Operating Manual Edition 11/2003

sinamics
Converter Cabinet Units
SINAMICS G150
75 kW to 800 kW
 Safety Notes 1

Device Overview 2

Mechanical Installation 3
SINAMICS G150
Electrical Installation 4
Versions A and C

Operating Instructions Commissioning

User Documentation 5

Operation 6

Setpoint Channel and 7

Closed-Loop Control

Output Terminals 8

Monitoring, Functions, 9
and Protective
Functions

Diagnosis / Faults and 10

Alarms
Valid for

Maintenance and 11
Converter Type Closed-Loop Control Version
SINAMICS G150 V1.3 Servicing

Technical Data 12

Index

Edition 11/03
11/03 Contents

For further information please visit us at:

http://www.ad.siemens.de

We have conscientiously checked the contents of this

The reproduction, transmission or use of this manual to ensure that they coincide with the hardware and
document or its contents is not permitted without software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded
express written authority. entirely, we cannot guarantee complete conformance.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, However, the data in this manual is reviewed regularly and
including rights created by patent grant or registration any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
or a utility model or design, are reserved. We are thankful for any recommendations or suggestions.
© Siemens AG 2003. All rights reserved. We reserve the right to make technical changes.

Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft

SINAMICS G150
ii Operating Manual
11/03 Contents

Preface
User Documentation
WARNING
Before installing and commissioning the converter, make sure that you read all the
safety notes and warnings carefully, including the warning labels on the equipment
itself. The warning labels must always be legible. Missing or damaged labels must
be replaced.

Further information is available from:

Technical Support
Tel: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 50 50 223
E-mail adsupport@siemens.com

Internet Address
Customers can access general and technical information at the following address:
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual iii
Contents 11/03

Contents

1 Safety Notes 1-1

1.1 Definitions and Warnings .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Safety and Operating Instructions................................................................................. 1-3
2 Device Overview 2-1
2.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Applications, Features, Design ..................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 Applications ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.2 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Design ........................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.1 Version A ..................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Version C..................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Wiring Principle ............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.5 Type Plate ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
3 Mechanical Installation 3-1
3.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Transportation and Storage .......................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Installation ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Mechanical Installation: Checklist ................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.2 Preparatory Steps........................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.3 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.4 Additional Canopies (Option M21) or Hoods (Option M23, M54)................................................. 3-6
3.3.5 Cable Entry from Above (Option M13), Motor Connection from Above (Option M78) ................. 3-9

4 Electrical Installation 4-1

4.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Electrical Installation: Checklist..................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Important Safety Precautions........................................................................................ 4-6
4.4 Introduction to EMC....................................................................................................... 4-7
4.5 EMC-Compliant Installation........................................................................................... 4-7
4.6 Power Connections ..................................................................................................... 4-10
4.6.1 Connection Cross-Sections and Cable Lengths ........................................................................ 4-10
4.6.2 Connecting the Motor and Power Cables .................................................................................. 4-11
4.6.3 Adjusting the Fan Voltage (-U1 -T10) ........................................................................................ 4-12
4.6.4 Adjusting the Internal Power Supply (-A1 -T10, Only with Version A) ....................................... 4-14
4.6.5 Removing the Connection Bracket for the Interference-Suppression Capacitor with
Operation from an Ungrounded Supply ..................................................................................... 4-15
4.7 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure Line....................................... 4-16
4.7.1 230 V AC Auxiliary Supply......................................................................................................... 4-17
4.7.2 24 V DC Auxiliary Supply........................................................................................................... 4-17
4.8 Signal Connections ..................................................................................................... 4-18
4.8.1 Customer Terminal Block (-A60) ............................................................................................... 4-18
4.9 Other Connections ...................................................................................................... 4-25
4.9.1 Main Contactor (Option L13) ..................................................................................................... 4-25
4.9.2 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment (Option L19)........................................................ 4-26
4.9.3 Main Circuit-Breaker incl. Fuses/Circuit-Breaker (Option L26) .................................................. 4-27
4.9.4 EMERGENCY OFF Button (Option L45) ................................................................................... 4-28

SINAMICS G150
iv Operating Manual
11/03 Contents

4.9.5 Cabinet Illumination with Service Socket (Option L50) .............................................................. 4-29
4.9.6 Cabinet Anti-Condensation Heating (Option L55)...................................................................... 4-29
4.9.7 EMERGENCY OFF Category 0; 230 V AC or 24 V DC (Option L57) ........................................ 4-30
4.9.8 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1; 230 V AC (Option L59)........................................................... 4-31
4.9.9 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1; 24 V DC (Option L60)............................................................. 4-32
4.9.10 100 kW Braking Unit (Option L61); 200 kW Braking Unit (Option L62)...................................... 4-33
4.9.11 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit (Option L83/L84) ................................................................... 4-38
4.9.12 PT100 Evaluation Unit (Option L86) .......................................................................................... 4-38
4.9.13 Insulation Monitor (Option L87)) ................................................................................................ 4-40

5 Commissioning 5-1
5.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 The Operator Panel....................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Initial Commissioning .................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Initial Ramp-Up............................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.2 Basic Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.4 Status After Commissioning.......................................................................................... 5-8
5.5 Data Backup.................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.5.1 Saving the CompactFlash Card Parameter Settings ................................................................... 5-9
5.5.2 Restoring the Saved Configuration............................................................................................ 5-10
5.6 Resetting Parameters to the Factory Settings ............................................................ 5-10
6 Operation 6-1
6.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Control via the Operator Panel...................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Operator Panel (AOP30) Overview ............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Menu Structure of the Operator Panel ......................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Operation via the Operator Panel (LOCAL Mode) ..................................................................... 6-11
6.2.4 Faults and Alarms...................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.5 Saving the Parameters Permanently ......................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.6 Parameterization Errors............................................................................................................. 6-18
6.3 Control via the Terminal Block .................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.2 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................................. 6-20
6.3.3 Motor Potentiometer .................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.3.4 Fixed Speed Setpoints............................................................................................................... 6-25
6.3.5 Further Settings for Analog Inputs ............................................................................................. 6-27
6.4 Control via PROFIBUS................................................................................................ 6-29
6.4.1 PROFIBUS Connection ............................................................................................................. 6-29
6.4.2 Control via PROFIBUS .............................................................................................................. 6-32
6.4.3 Process Data ............................................................................................................................. 6-33

7 Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control 7-1

7.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Setpoint Channel........................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Direction Reversal ....................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Minimum Speed........................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Speed Limitation.......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Ramp Generator.......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5 Further Settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3 Closed-Loop Control ..................................................................................................... 7-8
8 Output Terminals 8-1
8.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 Analog Outputs.............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.3 Digital Outputs............................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4 Further Settings for Analog Outputs.............................................................................. 8-8

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual v
Contents 11/03

9 Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions 9-1

9.1 Chapter Content ............................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Monitoring...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Functions....................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.1 Vdc-max Controller ...................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.2 Automatic Restart ........................................................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.3 Flying Restart .............................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.4 Protective Functions...................................................................................................... 9-8
10 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 10-1
10.1 Chapter Content .......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.1 Fault Diagnosis with LEDs......................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2 Diagnosis via Parameters.......................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.3 Indicating and Rectifying Faults................................................................................................. 10-7
10.3 Service and Support.................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Alarms and Faults ..................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.1 "External Warning 1"................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.4.2 "External Fault 1" ..................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.3 "External Fault 3" ..................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.5 List of Faults and Alarms........................................................................................... 10-12
10.5.1 Explanation of the List of Faults and Alarms............................................................................ 10-12
10.5.2 List of Faults and Alarms ......................................................................................................... 10-13

11 Maintenance and Servicing 11-1

11.1 Chapter Content .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Maintenance................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2.1 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Replacing the Filter Mats ........................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3 Servicing...................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3.1 Replacing the Fan ..................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3.2 Replacing the Fan Fuses........................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3.3 Replacing the Fuses for the Auxiliary Power Supply (-F11/-F12) .............................................. 11-4
11.3.4 Replacing Fuse -F21 ................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.3.5 Replacing the Cabinet Operator Panel ...................................................................................... 11-5
11.3.6 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet Operator Panel ................................................... 11-5
11.4 Reforming the DC Link Capacitors.............................................................................. 11-7
11.5 Upgrading the Cabinet Unit Firmware......................................................................... 11-8
11.6 Loading New Operator Panel Firmware and the Database from the PC.................. 11-10
11.7 Using a Replacement CompactFlash Card............................................................... 11-11
12 Technical Data 12-1
12.1 Chapter Content .......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 General Data ............................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 Derating Data ............................................................................................................................ 12-3
12.3 Technical Data ............................................................................................................ 12-4
12.3.1 Cabinet Unit Version A, 380 V – 480 V...................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.2 Cabinet Unit Version C, 380 V – 480 V ..................................................................................... 12-8
12.3.3 Cabinet Unit Version A, 660 V – 690 V.................................................................................... 12-11
12.3.4 Cabinet Unit Version C, 660 V – 690 V ................................................................................... 12-16

SINAMICS G150
vi Operating Manual
Safety Notes
1

1
1.1 Definitions and Warnings

Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels, a “qualified
person” is someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up,
operation and maintenance of the product. He or she must have the following
qualifications:
• Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground, and tag circuits and
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
• Training or instruction in the maintenance and use of appropriate safety
equipment in accordance with the technological safety standards.
• First aid training.

DANGER
“Danger” indicates that death, severe personal injury, or substantial property
damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
“Warning” indicates that death, severe personal injury, or substantial property
damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
“Caution” with a warning triangle indicates that minor personal injury can result if
proper precautions are not taken.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 1-1
Safety Notes 11/03

CAUTION
“Caution” without a warning triangle indicates that material damage can result if
proper precautions are not taken.

IMPORTANT
“Important” indicates that an unwanted result or situation can result if the
appropriate advice is not taken into account.

NOTE
“Note” indicates important information about the product or respective part of the
documentation that is essential to highlight.

WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment.
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and maintenance
procedures described in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on correct transport,
proper storage and installation, as well as careful operation and maintenance.
National safety guidelines must be observed.

Certification
The following certificates can be found under “Safety and Operating Instructions” in
the documentation folder:
• EU declaration of conformity
• Certificate of compliance with order
• EU manufacturer’s declaration

SINAMICS G150
1-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Safety Notes

1.2 Safety and Operating Instructions

DANGER
This equipment is used in industrial high-voltage installations. During operation,
this equipment contains rotating and live, bare parts. For this reason, they could
cause severe injury or significant material damage if the required covers are
removed, if they are used or operated incorrectly, or have not been properly
maintained.
When the machines are used in non-industrial areas, the installation location must
be protected against unauthorized access (protective fencing, appropriate signs).

Prerequisites
Those responsible for protecting the plant must ensure the following:
• The basic planning work for the plant and the transport, assembly, installation,
commissioning, maintenance, and repair work is carried out by qualified
personnel and/or checked by experts responsible.
• The operating instructions and machine documentation are always available.
• The technical data and specifications regarding the applicable installation,
connection, environmental, and operating conditions are always observed.
• The plant-specific assembly and safety guidelines are observed and personal
protection equipment is used.
• Unqualified personnel are forbidden from using these machines and working
near them.
These operating instructions are intended for qualified personnel and only contain
information and notes relating to the intended purpose of the machines.
The operating instructions and machine documentation are written in different
languages as specified in the delivery contracts.

NOTE
The services and support provided by the SIEMENS service centers are
recommended for planning, installation, commissioning, and servicing work.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 1-3
Safety Notes 11/03

Components that can be Destroyed by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

CAUTION
The board contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These components can be easily destroyed if not handled properly. If you do have
to use electronic boards, however, please observe the following:

• You should only touch electronic boards if absolutely necessary.

• If you have to touch boards, however, your body must be electrically discharged
beforehand.
• Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials (such as
plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from man-
made fibers).
• Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
• Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive
packaging (such as metalized plastic boxes or metal containers).
• If the packaging material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped with a
conductive packaging material (such as conductive foam rubber or household
aluminum foil).

The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly illustrated in the following
diagram:
• a = conductive floor surface
• b = ESD table
• c = ESD shoes
• d = ESD overall
• e = ESD chain
• f = cubicle ground connection

d
b d b d

e e

f f f f f

a c c a c a
Sitting Standing Sitting / Standing

Fig. 1-1 ESD protective measures

SINAMICS G150
1-4 Operating Manual
Device Overview
2

2
2.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• Introduction to the cabinet units
• The main components and features of the cabinet unit
• The cabinet unit wiring
• Explanation of the type plate

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 2-1
Device Overview 11/03

2.2 Applications, Features, Design

2.2.1 Applications

SINAMICS G150 drive converter cabinet units are ideally suited to variable-speed
drives with a quadratic load torque M~n2, such as:
• Pumps
• Fans
• Turbo-compressors

2.2.2 Features

Drives with a quadratic load torque do not normally require a high overload
reserve, nor do they require high-performance closed-loop control with a high
dynamic response, or a speed sensor.
SINAMICS G150 takes this into account and, as a result, offers a low-cost drive
solution tailored to actual requirements.
In addition, factors have been considered to ensure easy handling of the drive from
the planning and design phase through to operation. These factors include:
• Compact, modular, service-friendly design
• Straightforward planning and design
• Ready to connect to facilitate the installation process
• Quick, menu-driven commissioning with no complex parameterization
• Clear and convenient operation via a user-friendly graphical operator panel with
measured values and messages displayed in plain text and a quasi-analog bar
display for measured values.
• SINAMICS is an integral part of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA). The TIA
concept offers an optimized range of products for automation and drive
technology. This concept is characterized by planning / design, communication,
and data management procedures that are consistent throughout the product
range. SINAMICS is totally integrated in the TIA concept.

Quality
The SINAMICS G150 cabinet units are manufactured to meet high standards of
quality and exacting demands.
This results in a high level of reliability, availability, and functionality for our
products.
The development, design, and manufacturing processes, as well as order
processing and the logistics supply center have been independently certified to
DIN ISO 9001.

SINAMICS G150
2-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Device Overview

Service
Our worldwide sales and service network offers our customers individual
consultations, provides support with planning and design, and offers a range of
training courses.
Our Web site offers comprehensive online support with product information,
downloads, operating instructions, and FAQs.
Helplines and field services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, for
support and advice for servicing and ordering spare parts.

2.3 Design
The SINAMICS G150 cabinet units are characterized by their compact, modular,
and service-friendly design.
A wide range of electrical and mechanical components enable the drive system to
be optimized for the appropriate requirements.
Two cabinet unit versions are available depending on the options that are chosen.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 2-3
Device Overview 11/03

2.3.1 Version A

All the required power supply connection components, such as the main circuit-
breaker, circuit-breakers, main contactor, line fuses, radio interference suppression
filter, motor components, and additional protection and monitoring devices, can be
installed as required.
The cabinet unit comprises up to two cabinet panels with a total width of between
800 and 1600 mm, depending on the output.

Line reactor (-L1)

Operator panel

Converter (-U1)

EMERG.OFF (opt.)

Control unit CU320

(-A10)
Main circuit-breaker
(-Q1)

Door lock

Custumer terminal
block (-A60)

Ventilat. grille dep. on

degree of protection

Power connect. (-X1)

Motor connect. (-X2)

Fig. 2-1 Example of a cabinet unit, version A (e.g. 132 kW, 400 V)

SINAMICS G150
2-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Device Overview

2.3.2 Version C

This version is particularly compact in design with an in-built line reactor.

It can be used, for example, when the power supply connection components, such
as the main contactor and main circuit-breaker with fuses for conductor protection
and semi-conductor protection, are installed in an existing central low-voltage
distribution unit (MCC).
The advantage here is that the cabinet unit can be sited decentrally and in the
immediate vicinity of the motor, thereby avoiding the need for long motor cables
and additional output filters.
Line fuses are required for conductor protection (VDE 636, Part 10). Line fuses can
also be used to protect the semi-conductors of the line-commutated converter
(VDE 636, Part 40/ EN 60 269-4).
The cabinet unit simply comprises a single cabinet with a width of 400 mm, 600
mm, or 1000 mm.

Operator panel

Converter (-U1)

Control unit CU320

(-A10)

Door lock

Customer terminal
block (-A60)

Ventilation grille dep.

on degree of
protection

Motor connection
(-X2)

Power connection
(-X1)

Line reactor (-L1)

Fig. 2-2 Example of a cabinet unit, version C (e.g. 315 kW, 690 V)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 2-5
Device Overview 11/03

2.4 Wiring Principle

Wiring principle: versions A and C

PE Power connection PE

Main circuit-breaker 1)

Fuses 1)

Main contactor 1)

Line reactor Uk = 2 %
< 500 kW standard
> 500 kW only as option
( L23 ) !

~
~ Rectifier
~
~
= =
DC link
R2
R1 Brake chopper

= =
~
~
Inverter
~
~
PE Motor connection PE

Version A Version C
1) From an output current of > 800 A, the main circuit-breaker, fuses and main
contactor functions are implemented by means of circuit-breakers

Fig. 2-3 Wiring principle: versions A and C

IMPORTANT
The motor earth must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit.

SINAMICS G150
2-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Device Overview

2.5 Type Plate

Device designation

List of device
options

Month of manufacture
Year of manufacture

Fig. 2-4 Type plate for the cabinet unit

Date of Manufacture
The date of manufacture can be ascertained as follows:

Table 2-1 Year and month of manufacture

Letter / Year of manufacture Letter / Month of manufacture

number number
R 2003 1 to 9 January to September
S 2004 O October
T 2005 N November
U 2006 D December

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 2-7
Device Overview 11/03

Type Plate Data (from Type Plate on Previous Page)

Table 2-2 Type plate data

Specification Value Explanation

Input 3AC Three-phase connection
380 – 480 V Rated input voltage
239 A Rated input current
Output 3AC Three-phase connection
0 – 480 V Rated output voltage
210 A Rated output current
Temperature range 0 -40 °C Ambient temperature range within which the cabinet unit can
operate under 100 % load
Degree of protection IP20 Degree of protection

Duty class I I: Duty class I to EN 60146-1-1 = 100 % (continuously)

(with the specified current values, the cabinet unit can operate
continuously under 100 % load)
Cooling method AF A: coolant: air
F: circulation method: forced cooling, drive unit (fan) in the
device
Weight Weight of the cabinet unit

Explanation of the Option Short Codes

Table 2-3 Explanation of the option codes

Version
A C
Input options
L00 Radio interference suppression filter, limit class A1 (TN, TT systems) • −
L13 Main contactor (for currents < 800 A) • −
L22 Without line reactor in power range P < 500 kW (available soon) • •
L23 Line reactor uk = 2 % for P > 500 kW • •
L26 Main circuit-breaker (incl. fuses/circuit-breakers) • −
Output options
L08 Output filter • −
Input and output options
M70 EMC shield bus • •
M75 PE busbar • •

SINAMICS G150
2-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Device Overview

Version
A C
Motor protection and safety functions
L45 EMERGENCY OFF button in the cabinet unit door • −
L57 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 (230 V AC or 24 V DC, uncontrolled • −
stop)
L59 EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (230 V AC, controlled stop) • −
L60 EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (24 V AC, controlled stop) • −
L83 Thermistor motor protection unit with PTB approval (warning) • −
L84 Thermistor motor protection unit with PTB approval (shutdown) • −
L86 PT100 evaluation unit (for 6 PT100) • −
L87 Insulation monitoring • −
M60 Additional shock-hazard protection • •
Increase in degree of protection
M21 IP21 degree of protection • •
M23 IP23 degree of protection • •
M54 IP54 degree of protection • •
Mechanical options
M06 Plinth, 100 mm high, RAL 7022 • •
M07 Cable wiring compartment, 200 mm high, RAL 7035 • •
M13 Line connection from above • −
M78 Motor connection from above • −
M90 Top-mounted crane transport assembly for cabinets • •
Y09 Special paint finish for cabinet • •
Miscellaneous options
L19 Connection for external auxiliary equipment (controlled max. 10 A) • −
L50 Cabinet illumination with service socket • −
L55 Anti-condensation heating for standard cabinet • −
L61 100 kW braking unit • −
L62 200 kW braking unit • −
D58 Documentation in English / French • •
D60 Documentation in English / Spanish • •
D80 Documentation in English / Italian • •
T58 Type plate and operator panel in English / French • •
T60 Type plate and operator panel in English / Spanish • •
T80 Type plate and operator panel in English / Italian • •
• indicates that this option is available for that version.
− indicates that this option is not available for that version.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 2-9
Device Overview 11/03

SINAMICS G150
2-10 Operating Manual
Mechanical Installation
3

3
3.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• The conditions for transporting, storing, and installing the cabinet unit
• Preparing and installing the cabinet unit

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 3-1
Mechanical Installation 11/03

3.2 Transportation and Storage

Transportation

WARNING
The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported:

• The devices are heavy. Their center of gravity is displaced, and they can be top
heavy.
• Suitable hoisting gear operated by trained personnel is essential due to the
weight of the devices.
• The devices must only be transported in the upright position indicated. The
devices must not be transported upside down or horizontally.
• Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the
devices are not lifted or transported properly.

NOTES regarding transportation

• The devices are packaged by the manufacturers in accordance with the climatic
conditions and stress encountered during transit and in the recipient country.
• The notes on the packaging for transportation, storage, and proper handling
must be observed.
• The devices must be carried on a wooden palette when transported with fork-lift
trucks.
• When the devices are unpacked, they can be transported using the optional
transport eyebolts (option M90) or rails on the cabinet unit. The load must be
distributed evenly. Heavy blows or impacts must be avoided during transit and
when the devices are being set down, for example.
• Permissible ambient temperatures:
Ventilation: -25°C to +70°C, class 2K3 to IEC 60 721-3-2
Up to -40°C for max. 24 hours

NOTES regarding built-in system-side components

If built-in system-side components are to be installed on doors or side panels, you
must take into account the following points:
• The degree of protection (IP20, IP21, IP23, IP54) must not be reduced as a
result.
• The electromagnetic compatibility of the cabinet unit must not be adversely
affected.
• When control elements are installed on side or rear panels, the panels must be
grounded separately.

SINAMICS G150
3-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Mechanical Installation

NOTES regarding damage in transit

• Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the device before accepting the
delivery from the transportation company.
• Ensure that you have received all the items specified on the delivery note.
• Notify the transportation company immediately of any missing components or
damage.
• If you identify any hidden deficiencies or damage, contact the transportation
company immediately and ask them to examine the device.
• If you fail to contact them immediately, you may lose your right to claim
compensation for the deficiencies and damage.
• If necessary, you can request the support of your local Siemens branch.

WARNING
Damage in transit indicates that the device was subject to unreasonable stress.
The electrical safety of the device can no longer be ensured. It must not be
connected until a thorough high-voltage test has been carried out.

Death, serious injury, or substantial material damage can result if these factors are
not taken into account.

Storage
The devices must be stored in clean, dry rooms. Permissible temperatures:
between –25°C and +70°C. Temperature variations greater than 20 K per hour are
not permitted.
If the device is stored for a prolonged period once it has been unpacked, cover it or
take other appropriate measures to ensure that it does not become dirty and that it
is protected against environmental influences. If such measures are not taken, the
guarantee becomes invalid in the event of a claim for damages.

WARNING
The storage period should not exceed two years. If the device is stored for more
than two years, the DC link capacitors of the devices must be reformed during
commissioning.

The reforming procedure is described in "Maintenance and Servicing”.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 3-3
Mechanical Installation 11/03

3.3 Installation
WARNING
To ensure that the devices operate safely and reliably, they must be properly
installed and put into operation by qualified personnel, taking into account the
warning messages provided in these operating instructions.
In particular, both the general and national installation and safety guidelines for
high-voltage installations (e.g. VDE – the Union of German Technical Engineers)
and the guidelines relating to the professional use of tools and the use of personal
protective equipment must be observed.
Death, serious injury, or substantial material damage can result if these factors are
not taken into account.

3.3.1 Mechanical Installation: Checklist

Use the following checklist to guide you through the mechanical installation
procedure for the cabinet unit. Read the safety notes at the start of these operating
instructions before you start working on the device.

NOTE
Check the boxes accordingly in the right-hand column if the activity applies to the
cabinet unit in your scope of supply. In the same way, check the boxes once you
have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete.

Item Activity Fulfilled/Complete

1 The ambient conditions must be permissible. See "Technical Data,
General Technical Data".
The cabinet unit must be firmly attached to the fixing points provided. With
version C with a width of 400 mm, the cabinet unit can, if required, be
secured to a non-flammable vertical surface by means of the wall support
supplied (see Section 3.3.2).
The cooling air can flow unobstructed.
2 The minimum ceiling height (for unhindered air outlet) specified in the
operating instructions must be observed. The cooling air supply must be
not be obstructed (see Section 3.3.2).
3 Components that are supplied separately for transport reasons (canopy or
hood) must be fitted (see Section 3.3.4).
4 The clearance around an open door (escape route) specified in the
applicable accident prevention guidelines must be observed.
5 For option M13/M78:
Choose the required metric screw connections or conduit thread
connections on the basis of the cable cross-section and drill the required
holes in the blanking plates. When the cable is fed in from above, ensure
that enough room is available if the cable has to be bent because of the
cable feeder. The cable should be fed in vertically to minimize transverse
forces on the entries.

SINAMICS G150
3-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Mechanical Installation

3.3.2 Preparatory Steps

On-Site Requirements
The cabinet units are suitable for installation in general operating areas (DlN VDE
0558 / Edition 7.87, Part 1 / Section 5.4.3.2.4).
The standard specifies the following:
When power conversion units are installed in general operating areas, live parts
must be protected in such a way that they cannot be touched either directly or
indirectly.
The operating areas must be dry and free of dust. The air supplied must not
contain any electrically conductive gas, vapors, or dust, which could impair the
function of the devices. It may be necessary to filter the air supplied to the
installation room. If the air contains dust, filter mats (option M54) can be installed in
front of the hoods (IP54) and the ventilation grilles on the cabinet doors.
The ambient conditions for the units in the operating rooms must not exceed the
values of code F in accordance with EN 60146. At temperatures > 40°C (104°F)
and altitudes > 2000 m, the devices must be derated.
The basic version of the cabinet units complies with the IP20 degree of protection
in accordance with EN 60529.
The cabinet units are installed in accordance with the dimension drawings
supplied. The clearance between the top of the cabinet unit and the ceiling is also
specified on the dimension drawings.
The cooling air for the power unit is drawn in from the front through the ventilation
grilles in the lower part of the cabinet doors. The warmed air is expelled through
the perforated top cover or the ventilation grilles in the top cover (with option
M23/M54). Cooling air can also be supplied from below through raised floors or air
ducts, for example. To allow this, you have to create openings in the 3-section
bottom plate.
According to EN 61800-3, the cabinet units are not suitable for use in low-voltage
public networks that supply residential buildings. High-frequency interference may
occur if they are used in this type of network.

Unpacking the Cabinet Units

Check the delivery against the delivery note to ensure that all the items have been
delivered. Check that the cabinet is intact.
The packaging material must be discarded in accordance with the applicable
country-specific guidelines and rules.

Required Tools
To install the connections, you will require:
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 10)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 13)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 18/19)
• Hexagon-socket spanner (size 8)
• Torque spanner (max. 50 Nm)
• Screwdriver (size 2)
• Screwdriver (Torx T20)
• Screwdriver (Torx T30)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 3-5
Mechanical Installation 11/03

3.3.3 Installation

Lifting the Device off the Transport Palette

The applicable local guidelines regarding the transportation of the cabinet from the
transport palette to the installation location must be observed.
A crane transport assembly (option M90) can also be fitted on the top of the
cabinet.

Installation
Four holes for M12 screws are provided on each cabinet panel to secure the
cabinet to the ground. The fixing dimensions are specified on the dimension
drawings enclosed.
Two wall supports for attaching the top of the cabinet to the wall are also supplied
for 400 mm-wide cabinets to provide extra security.

3.3.4 Additional Canopies (Option M21) or Hoods (Option M23, M54)

To increase the degree of protection of the cabinets from IP20 (standard) to IP21,
IP23, or IP54, additional canopies or hoods are supplied. These must be fitted
once the cabinets have been installed.

Description
The degree of protection can be increased to IP21 by fitting an additional canopy.
The canopy is flush-mounted with the cabinet unit and is fitted using spacers at a
distance of 250 mm above the top of the cabinet. As a result, cabinets with a
canopy are 250 mm higher.
Cabinet units with degree of protection IP23 are supplied with additional hoods, as
well as plastic ventilation grilles and braided plastic in the air inlet (doors) and outlet
(hoods). The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a
recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted. Air
escapes from the front and back. The hood is secured by means of the four holes
for the crane hook in the cabinet. Hoods increase the height of the cabinet by 400
mm.
Cabinet units with degree of protection IP54 are supplied with additional hoods,
plastic ventilation grilles, and a filter medium in the air inlet (doors) and outlet
(hoods). The filter mediums can be easily fitted and replaced from the outside. Air
escapes from the front and back. Compliance with degree of protection IP54
requires an intact filter medium, which must be replaced on a regular basis due to
the prevailing ambient conditions.

SINAMICS G150
3-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Mechanical Installation

Attaching a Canopy to Increase the Degree of Protection (Option M21)

1. Remove the crane transport assembly (if fitted).
2. Attach the spacers to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified. You may
have to remove the protective grille.
3. Fit the canopy to the spacers.

Attach the supplied bolts from

above

Attach the supplied bolts

from below

Fig. 3-1 Cabinet with attached canopy

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 3-7
Mechanical Installation 11/03

Attaching a Hood to Increase the Degree of Protection to IP23 / IP54 (Option M23
/ M54)
• Remove the crane transport assembly (if fitted).
• Make sure that the perforated top cover is not fitted on the top of the cabinet
(depending on production requirements, this can be fitted at a later stage).
• For option M54 only:
Secure the contact surfaces of the hood on top of the cabinet using the sealing
tape provided.
• Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified (fixing points for
the crane transport assembly).

Attach the original hood

bolts (M14) from above

Attach the supplied bolts and

washers (M8) from below
Additional screw fittings are
provided for wide hoods

Fig. 3-2 Attaching a hood

SINAMICS G150
3-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Mechanical Installation

3.3.5 Cable Entry from Above (Option M13), Motor Connection from
Above (Option M78)

Cable Entry from Above

With options M13 and M78, the cabinet unit is equipped with an additional hood.
The connection straps for the power cables, the clamping bar for mechanically
securing the cables, an EMC shield bus, and a PE busbar are located within the
hood.
The hood adds an extra 405 mm to the cabinet height. The busbars for connection
from above are fully mounted when the system is delivered. For transport reasons,
the hoods are delivered separately and must be mounted on site. With options M23
and M54, plastic ventilation grilles and filter mats are also supplied.
A 5 mm aluminum mounting plate (with no holes) is fitted in the roof of the cover for
feeding in the cables. Depending on the number of cables and the cross-sections
used, holes for attaching cable glands for feeding in the cables must be drilled in
this mounting plate on site.

NOTE
The control cables and optional brake resistors are connected as before from
below.

Attaching the Hood

• Remove the crane transport assembly (if fitted).
• For option M54 too:
Secure the contact surfaces of the hood on top of the cabinet using the sealing
tape provided.
• Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified (fixing points for
the crane transport assembly).
• To secure the power cables, remove the front panel of the hood.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 3-9
Mechanical Installation 11/03

Mounting plate for Insert original M14 hood

cable entry bolts from above

Insert the bolts and washers

(M8) supplied from below
Additional screw connections are
available here for wider hoods

Fig. 3-3 Attaching the hood with M13 / M78

SINAMICS G150
3-10 Operating Manual
Electrical Installation
4

4
4.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• Establishing the electrical connections for the cabinet unit
• Adjusting the fan voltage and the internal power supply to local conditions
(supply voltage)
• The customer terminal block and its interfaces
• The interfaces for additional options

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-1
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.2 Electrical Installation: Checklist

Use the following checklist to guide you through the electrical installation procedure
for the cabinet unit. Read the safety notes at the start of these operating
instructions before you start working on the device.

NOTE
Check the boxes accordingly in the right-hand column if the activity applies to the
cabinet unit in your scope of supply. In the same way, check the boxes once you
have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete.

Item Activity Fulfilled/Complete

Power Connections
1 The line-side and motor-side power cables must be dimensioned and
routed in accordance with the ambient and routing conditions. The
maximum permissible cable lengths between the converter and motor
must be observed depending on the type of cable used (see Section
4.6.1).
The motor ground must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit.
The cables must be properly connected with a torque of 50 Nm to the
cabinet unit terminals. The cables for the motor and low-voltage
switchgear must also be connected with the required torques.
2 The cables between the low-voltage switchgear and the cabinet unit must
be protected with line fuses for conductor protection (VDE 636, Part 10).
With version C, combined fuses must be used for conductor and semi-
protection (VDE636, Part 40 / EN60269-4). See “Technical Data” for the
appropriate fuses.
3 For strain relief, the cables must be clamped on the cable clamping bar (C-
bar).
4 When EMC-shielded cables are used, screwed glands that connect the
shield to ground with the greatest possible surface area must be provided
on the motor terminal box. On the cabinet, the cables must be grounded
with the clips supplied with the EMC shield bar with the greatest possible
surface area (shield bar supplied with option L00 or can be ordered
separately with option M70 – see Chapter 4.5).
5 The cable shields must be properly applied and the cabinet properly
grounded at the appropriate points (see Chapter 4.5).
6 The voltage for the fan transformer (-U1-T10) for versions A and C, and
the internal power supply (-A1-T10) for version A must be adapted to the
supply voltage of the cabinet unit (see Section 4.6.3).
7 Before the cabinet is operated from an ungrounded supply/IT supply, the
connection bracket for the basic interference suppression device must be
removed (see Section 4.6.5).

SINAMICS G150
4-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

Item Activity Fulfilled/Complete

8 The type plate can be used to ascertain the date of manufacture. If the
period from the date of manufacture to initial commissioning or the cabinet
unit downtime is less than two years, the DC link capacitors do not have to
be reformed. If the downtime period is longer than two years, they must be
reformed in accordance with the description in the "Maintenance and
Servicing" section.

9 With an external auxiliary supply, the cable for the 230 V AC supply must
be connected to terminal -X40, while the cable for the 24 V DC supply
must be connected to terminal –X9 (see Section 4.7).
10 Option L50 The 230 V auxiliary supply for the cabinet illumination
Cabinet with an integrated service socket must be connected to
illumination with terminal X390 and, on the system side, protected with a
socket fuse (max. 10 A) (see Section 4.9.5).

11 Option L19 To supply auxiliary equipment (e.g. separately-driven fan

Connection for for motor), the drive must be properly connected to
external terminals -X155:1 (L1) to -X155:3 (L3). The supply
auxiliary voltage of the auxiliary equipment must match the input
equipment voltage of the cabinet unit and the load current must not
be greater than 10 A (see Section 4.9.2).
12 Option L55 The 230 V auxiliary supply for the anti-condensation
Anti- heating for the cabinet (230 V / 50 Hz, 100 W / or
condensation 230 V / 50 Hz 2 x 100 W for cabinets with a width of 800
heating for to 1200 mm) must be connected to terminals -X240: 1 to
cabinet 3 and protected with fuses (max. 16 A) (see Section
4.9.6).
Signal Connections
13 Cabinet unit operation by higher-level controller / control room. The control
cables must be connected in accordance with the interface assignment
and the shield applied. Taking into account electrical interference and the
distance from power cables, the digital and analog signals must be routed
with separate cables.
Connecting protection and monitoring devices
14 Option L45 The contacts for the EMERGENCY OFF button are
EMERGENCY connected to terminal -X120 and can be picked off so
OFF button that they can be integrated in a higher-level installation
protection concept (see Section 4.9.4).
15 Option L57 EMERGENCY OFF category 0 stops the drive in an
EMERGENCY uncontrolled manner. No additional wiring is necessary
OFF category 0 when implemented in conjunction with option L45.
(230 V AC / If the cabinet unit is integrated in an external safety
24 V DC) circuit, however, the contact must be looped in via
terminal block -X120 (see Section 4.9.7).

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-3
Electrical Installation 11/03

Item Activity Fulfilled/Complete

16 Option L59 EMERGENCY OFF category 1 stops the drive in a
EMERGENCY controlled manner. With this option, it may be necessary
OFF category 1 to implement braking units (brake chopper and external
(230 V AC) braking resistors) due to the load characteristic and to
achieve the required shutdown times. No additional
wiring is necessary when implemented in conjunction
with option L45. If the cabinet unit is integrated in an
external safety circuit, however, the contact must be
looped in via terminal block -X120 (see Section 4.9.8).
17 Option L60 EMERGENCY OFF category 1 stops the drive in a
EMERGENCY controlled manner. With this option, it may be necessary
OFF category 1 to implement braking units (brake chopper and external
(24 V DC) braking resistors) due to the load characteristic and to
achieve the required shutdown times. No additional
wiring is necessary when implemented in conjunction
with option L45. If the cabinet unit is integrated in an
external safety circuit, however, the contact must be
looped in via terminal block -X120 (see Section 4.9.9).
18 Option L61/L62 The connecting cables and ground for the braking
Braking unit resistor must be connected to terminal block –X5:
R1/R2. A connection must be established between the
braking resistor thermostat and customer terminal block
–A60. The settings for evaluating the thermostat as
"External Fault 3" must be made (see 4.9.10).
19 Option L83 The PTC thermistor sensors (PTC resistor type A) must
Thermistor be connected to the thermistor motor protection unit
motor -F127 at terminals T1 and T2 for warning (see Section
protection unit 4.9.11).
(warning)
20 Option L84 The PTC thermistor sensors (PTC resistor type A) must
Thermistor be connected to the thermistor motor protection unit
motor -F125 at terminals T1 and T2 for shutdown (see Section
protection unit 4.9.11).
(shutdown)
21 Option L86 The resistor thermometers must be connected to
PT100 evaluation unit -A140 for the PT100 evaluation. The two-
evaluation unit wire or three-wire system can be used here to connect
the PT100 sensors. The sensors are divided into two
groups (see Section 4.9.12). This must be taken into
account when the evaluation is performed (factory
setting).

SINAMICS G150
4-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

Item Activity Fulfilled/Complete

22 Option L87 The insulation monitor can only be operated with the
Insulation insulated-neutral system. Only one insulation monitor
monitoring may be used in one electrically connected network. For
system-side control, the signaling relays must be
connected accordingly or, with individual drives (the
cabinet unit is fed via a converter transformer assigned
to the cabinet unit), integrated in the cabinet unit warning
train (see 4.9.13).
Point 7 must also be taken into account: Before the
cabinet is operated from an ungrounded supply/IT
supply, the connection bracket for the interference-
suppression capacitor must be removed (see 4.6.5).

Required Tools
To install the connections, you will require:
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 10)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 13)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 18/19)
• Hexagon-socket spanner (size 8)
• Torque spanner, max. 50 Nm
• Screwdriver, size 2
• Screwdriver Torx T20
• Screwdriver Torx T30

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-5
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.3 Important Safety Precautions

WARNING
The cabinet units are operated with high voltages.
All connection procedures must be carried out with the cabinet de-energized.
All work on the units must be carried out by trained personnel only.
Death, serious injury, or substantial material damage can result if these warnings
are not taken into account.

Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because
external supply voltages may be present. The power and control terminals may be
live even when the motor is not running.
Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the cabinet up to five minutes
after it has been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors. For this reason, the
cabinet should not be opened until after a reasonable period of time has elapsed.

Reforming the DC link capacitors:

The storage period should not exceed two years. If the device is stored for more
than two years, the DC link capacitors of the devices must be reformed during
commissioning.
The reforming procedure is described in "Maintenance and Servicing”.

The operator is responsible for ensuring that the motor, converter, and other
devices are installed and connected in accordance with the recognized technical
rules in the country of installation and applicable regional guidelines. Special
attention should be paid to cable dimensioning, fuses, grounding, shutdown,
disconnection, and overcurrent protection.

If an item of protective gear trips in a branch circuit, a leakage current may have
been disconnected. To reduce the risk of fire or an electric shock, the current-
carrying parts and other components in the cabinet unit should be inspected and
damaged parts replaced. When an item of protective gear trips, the cause of the
trip must be identified and rectified.

NOTE
The standard version of the cabinet units are equipped with shock-hazard
protection in accordance with BGV A 2 (formerly VBG 4) to DIN 57 106, Part 100 /
VDE 0106, Part 100.

The version with option M60 features additional protective covers that offer a
higher level of shock-hazard protection for current-carrying parts when the cabinet
doors are open.
These protective covers may have to be removed during installation and
connection procedures. Once work has been completed, the protective covers
must be properly refitted.

SINAMICS G150
4-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.4 Introduction to EMC

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the capability of an electrical device
to function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing
interference unacceptable for other devices in the environment.
EMC, therefore, represents a quality standard for the following:
• Internal noise immunity: resistance against internal electrical disturbances
• External noise immunity: resistance against external electromagnetic
disturbances
• Noise emission level: environmental effects caused by electromagnetic
emissions
To ensure that the cabinet unit functions satisfactorily in the system, the
environment subject to interference must not be neglected. For this reason, special
requirements exist regarding the structure and the EMC of the system.

Operational Reliability and Noise Immunity

Measures must be taken by the converter manufacturer and the operator to ensure
the greatest possible level of operational reliability and noise immunity within the
entire system (converters, automation systems, drive motors, and so on). Only
when all of these measures have been taken are the satisfactory function of the
converter and compliance with the legal requirements (89/336/EEC) ensured.

Noise Emissions
Product standard EN 61800 - 3 specifies requirements for converters with
operating voltages less than 1000 V. Provided that the following are taken into
account, the converters meet the requirements for use in industrial applications.

4.5 EMC-Compliant Installation

The following section provides some basic information and guidelines that will help
you comply with the EMC and CE guidelines.

Cabinet Assembly
• Connect painted or anodized metal components using toothed self-locking
screws or remove the insulating layer.
• Use unpainted, de-oiled mounting plates.
• Establish a central connection between ground and the protective conductor
system (ground).

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-7
Electrical Installation 11/03

Shield Gaps
• Bridge shield gaps (at terminals, circuit-breakers, contactors, and so on) with
minimum impedance and the greatest possible surface area.

Using Large Cross-Sections

• Use underground and grounding cables with large cross-sections or, better still,
with litz wires or flexible cables.

Laying the Motor Supply Cable Separately

• The distance between the motor supply cable and signal cable should be > 20
cm. Do not lay power cables and motor supply cables in parallel to each other.

Securing the Potential to Ground Between Modules with Widely Differing

Interference Potential
• Lay an equalizing cable parallel to the control cable (the cable cross-section
must be at least 16 mm²).
• If relays, contactors, and inductive or capacitive loads are connected, the
switching relays or contactors must be provided with anti-interference elements.

Cable Installation
• Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart
from each other as possible.
• Noise immunity increases when the cables are laid close to the ground
potential. For this reason, you are advised to lay these cables in corners and on
the ground potential.
• Ground the spare cables at at least one end.
• Long cables should be shortened or laid in noise resistant areas to avoid
additional connecting points.
• Conductors or cables that carry signals of different classes must cross at right
angles, especially if they carry sensitive signals that are subject to interference.
– Class 1:
unshielded cables for ≤ 60 V DC
unshielded cables for ≤ 25 V AC
shielded analog signal cables
shielded bus and data cables
operator panel interface, incremental/absolute encoder lines
– Class 2:
unshielded cables for > 60 V DC and ≤ 230 V DC
unshielded cables for > 25 V AC and ≤ 230 V AC
– Class 3:
unshielded cables for > 230 V AC/DC and ≤ 1000 V AC/DC

SINAMICS G150
4-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

Shield Connection
• Shields must not be used to conduct electricity. In other words, they must not
simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors.
• Apply the shield so that it covers the greatest possible surface area. You can
use ground clamps, ground terminals, or ground screw connections.
• Avoid extending the shield to the grounding point using a wire (pigtail) because
this will reduce the effectiveness of the shield by up to 90%.
• Attach the shield to a shield bar directly after the line inlet into the cabinet.
Insulate the entire shielded cable and route the shield up to the device
connection, but do not connect it again.

I/O Connection
• Create a low-impedance ground connection for additional cabinets, system
components, and distributed devices with the largest possible cross-section (at
least 16 mm²).
• Ground unused lines at one end in the cabinet.
• Choose the greatest possible clearance between the power and signal cables
(at least 20 cm). The greater the distance over which the cables are routed in
parallel, the greater the clearance must be. If a sufficient clearance cannot be
maintained, you must install additional shields.
• Avoid unnecessarily long cable loops.

Filtering Cables
• Line supply cables and power supply cables for devices and modules may have
to be filtered in the cabinet to reduce incoming or outgoing disturbances.
• To improve the EMC properties and depending on the installation location, a
radio interference suppression filter is recommended (e.g. option L00 (radio
interference suppression filter to EN55011, limit class A1)).

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-9
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.6 Power Connections

WARNING
• Swapping the input and output terminals can destroy the cabinet unit!
• Swapping or short-circuiting the DC link terminals can destroy the cabinet unit!
• The contactor and relay operating coils that are connected to the same supply
network as the cabinet unit or are located near the cabinet unit must be
connected to overvoltage limiters (e.g. RC elements).
• The cabinet unit must not be operated via a residual current operated device
(DIN VDE 0160).

4.6.1 Connection Cross-Sections and Cable Lengths

Connection Cross-Sections
The connection cross-sections for the input power connection, motor connection,
and cabinet grounding for your cabinet unit are specified in the tables provided in
the "Technical Data" section.

Cable Lengths
The following table shows the maximum permissible cable lengths (with output filter
(option L08) and without output filter) for standard cable types or cable types
recommended by SIEMENS. Longer cables can only be used after consultation.
The cable lengths specified represent the actual distance between the cabinet unit
and the motor, taking into account parallel routing, current-carrying capacity, and
the cable-laying factor.

Table 4-1 Max. permissible cable lengths

Cabinet unit w/o output filter

Voltage Output Protoflex Shielded cable Unshielded cable
EMC 3 Plus (e.g. Protodur NYCWY) (e.g. Protodur NYY)
380 - 480 V 110 kW 300 m 200 m 300 m
380 - 480 V 132 - 560 kW 300 m 300 m 450 m
660 - 690 V 75 - 800 kW 300 m 100 m 150 m
with output filter
380 - 480 V 110 kW 300 m 300 m 450 m
Not required up to 300 Not required up to
380 - 480 V 132 - 560 kW 300 m
m 450 m
660 - 690 V 75 - 800 kW 300 m 200 m 300 m

SINAMICS G150
4-10 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

NOTE
The PROTOFLEX-EMV-3 PLUS shielded cable recommended by Siemens is the
protective conductor and comprises three symmetrically arranged protective
conductors. The individual protective conductors must each be provided with cable
eyes and be connected to ground. The cable also has a concentric flexible braided
copper shield. To comply with EN55011 regarding radio interference suppression,
the shield must contact at both ends and with the greatest possible surface area.

On the motor side, cable glands that contact the shield with the greatest possible
surface area are recommended for the terminal boxes.

4.6.2 Connecting the Motor and Power Cables

Connecting the Motor and Power Cables on the Cabinet Unit

NOTE
The location of the connections is indicated in the layout diagrams provided in 3.

1. Open the cabinet, remove the covers (if necessary) in front of the connection
panel for motor cables (terminals U2/T1, V2/T2, W2/T3; X2) and power cables
(terminals U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3; X1).
2. Move or remove the bottom plate below the connection panel through which the
motor cables are fed.
3. Screw the protective earth (PE) into the appropriate terminal (with earth symbol)
(50 Nm with M12) at the points provided in the cabinet.

NOTE
With version C, connect the power cables first and then the motor cables.

4. Screw the motor cables into the terminals.

Ensure that you have followed the correct sequence for connecting the
conductors: U2/T1, V2/T2, W2/T3 and U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3!

CAUTION
Tighten the screws with the appropriate torque (50 Nm with M12), otherwise the
terminal contacts could catch fire during operation.

NOTE
The motor ground must be fed back directly to the cabinet unit and connected.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-11
Electrical Installation 11/03

Direction of Motor Rotation

With induction machines with a clockwise phase sequence (looking at the drive
shaft), the motor must be connected to the cabinet unit as follows.

Table 4-2 Connection terminals on the cabinet unit and motor

Cabinet unit (connection terminals) Motor (connection terminals)

U2/T1 U
V2/T2 V
W2/T3 W

In contrast to the connection for the clockwise phase sequence, two phases have
to be reversed with a counter-clockwise phase sequence (looking at the drive
shaft).

NOTE
If an incorrect phase sequence was connected when the cables were routed, and
the phase sequence cannot be corrected by subsequently swapping the motor
cables, it can be corrected by means of a negative command value or by
parameterizing the cabinet unit.

With motors that can be operated in a star/delta configuration, the windings must
be checked to ensure that they have been connected properly. Please refer to the
relevant documentation for the motor and note the required insulation voltage for
operating the cabinet unit.

4.6.3 Adjusting the Fan Voltage (-U1 -T10)

A transformer is installed to ensure that the operating voltage of the 230 V fan is
correct. The location of the fan transformer is indicated in the layout diagrams
supplied.
The primary terminals of the transformer may need to be reconnected to the
existing supply voltage. The terminals must be connected to "0" and the supply
voltage.

0 380V 400V 440V 480V 0 600V CON 660V 690V

SINAMICS G150
4-12 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

Fig. 4-1 Setting terminals for the fan transformer (380 V – 480 V / 660 V – 690 V)

The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan
transformer are indicated in the following table.

NOTE
With the 660 V – 690 V fan transformer, a jumper is inserted between terminal
“600 V” and terminal “CON”. Terminal “CON” is for internal use.

IMPORTANT
If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual supply voltage:

• the required cooling capacity cannot be provided because the fan rotates too
slowly
• the fan fuses may blow due to an overcurrent.

NOTE
The order numbers for fan fuses that have blown can be found in the spare parts
list.

Table 4-3 Supply voltage assignments for the fan transformer setting (380 V - 480 V)

Supply voltage Fan transformer tap (-U1 -T10)

342 V - 390 V 380 V
391 V - 430 V 400 V
431 V - 460 V 440 V
461 V - 528 V 480 V

Table 4-4 Supply voltage assignments for the fan transformer setting (660 V - 690 V)

Supply voltage Fan transformer tap (-U1 -T10)

600 V - 630 V 600 V
631 V - 680 V 660 V
681 V - 759 V 690 V

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-13
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.6.4 Adjusting the Internal Power Supply (-A1 -T10, Only with
Version A)

A transformer is installed for the internal power supply of the cabinet. The location
of the transformer is indicated in the layout diagrams supplied.
The primary terminals of the transformer may need to be reconnected to the
existing supply voltage.
The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the
transformer for the internal power supply are indicated in the following table.

IMPORTANT
If the terminals are not reconnected to the actual supply voltage, the internal power
supply will not be correct.

Table 4-5 Supply voltage assignments for the internal power supply (380 V - 480 V)

Supply Voltage Range Tapping Matching transformer taps (A1 -T10) LH1 – LH2
342 V - 390 V 380 V 1–2
391 V - 410 V 400 V 1–3
411 V - 430 V 415 V 1–4
431 V - 450 V 440 V 1–5
451 V - 470 V 460 V 1–6
471 V - 528 V 480 V 1–7

Table 4-6 Supply voltage assignments for the internal power supply (660 V - 690 V)

Supply Voltage Range Tapping Matching transformer taps (A1 -T10) LH1 – LH2
591 V - 630 V 600 V 1 – 12
631 V - 680 V 660 V 1 – 14, terminals 12 and 13 are bridged
681 V - 759 V 690 V 1 –15, terminals 12 and 13 are bridged

SINAMICS G150
4-14 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.6.5 Removing the Connection Bracket for the Interference-

Suppression Capacitor with Operation from an Ungrounded
Supply

If the cabinet unit is operated from an ungrounded supply/IT supply, the connection
bracket for the interference-suppression capacitor of the converter (-U1) must be
removed.

Unscrew bolts M4 (Torx T20) and remove the connection bracket

Fig. 4-2 Removing the connection bracket for the interference-suppression capacitor

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-15
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.7 External Supply of the Auxiliary Supply from a Secure

Line

Description
An external auxiliary supply is always recommended when communication and
closed-loop control are to be independent of the main supply system or an
automatic restart function, for example, is activated. An external auxiliary supply is
particularly recommended for low-power lines susceptible to short-time voltage dips
or power failures.
Note the optional version of the cabinet unit. Different connection options are
available depending on the options selected.

Table 4-7 Connection options for the external auxiliary voltage depending on the selected options.

Cabinet unit option External supply of auxiliary voltage independent of the main supply
24 V DC 230 V AC 24 V DC 230 V AC (terminal –X40)
terminal –X9 terminal –X40 (terminal –X9) with options L13 / L26
230 V AC (when I > 800 A)
*1)
(terminal –X40)
- With no further X
options
- Version C
L13 X
L26 (when I > 800 A) X
L83 X X
L84 X X
L86 X X
L87 X X
*1)
This is required when not only the open and closed-loop control but also the 230
V AC consumer (thermistor motor protection, PT100 evaluation unit, or insulation
monitor) is to remain in operation if the main supply fails.
With an external supply independent of the main supply, warnings and fault
messages may still be displayed on the operator panel and internal protection and
monitoring devices if the main supply fails.

SINAMICS G150
4-16 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.7.1 230 V AC Auxiliary Supply

The maximum fuse rating is 16 A. The cables must be capable of supplying 630 VA
for the transformer.

Connection
• On terminal block -X40, remove the jumpers between terminals 1 and 2 as well
as 5 and 6.
• Connect the external 230 V AC supply to terminals 2 (L1) and 6 (N).

4.7.2 24 V DC Auxiliary Supply

The power requirement is 4 A.

Connection
Connect the external 24 V DC supply to terminals 1 (P 24 V) and 2 (Mext) of
terminal block –X9.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-17
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.8 Signal Connections

4.8.1 Customer Terminal Block (-A60)

NOTE
The factory setting and description of the customer terminal block can be found in
the circuit diagrams.

The location of the customer terminal block in the cabinet unit is indicated in the
layout diagram.

Shield Connection
The shield connection of shielded control cables on the customer terminal block –
A60 is established in the immediate vicinity of the terminal block. For this purpose,
the customer terminal block –A60 and the mounting plates have cut-out sections
which are used to snap the enclosed shield springs into place. The shields of
incoming and outgoing cables must be applied directly to these shield connections.
It is important here to establish the greatest possible area of contact and a good
conductive connection.

NOTE
These shield springs can be used for all control cables in the cabinet unit because
all the shield connections are identical in design.

Fig. 4-3 Shield connection

SINAMICS G150
4-18 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

-X540
SIEMENS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RDY X540
-X520 -X530 Auxiliary power
supply

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
X520 X530
Digital inputs

S5
Current/voltage -X541
V I S5.0
switchover for V I S5.1

1 2 3 4 5 6
analog inputs -X521 X541
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Digital outputs
X521
Analog inputs

-X542
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-X522
X522 2 X542
Analog outputs, 3 Relay 1
temperature sensor 4 Relay 2
5
6

Shield connection

Protective
conductor
connection M4
Fig. 4-4 Customer terminal block TM31

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-19
Electrical Installation 11/03

M +
+

Customer terminal block

X524

+
+ 24 V
X521
+
AI 0+ 1
M A + S5.0
M D - 2
AI 0-
M
M 3
AI 1+
A + S5.1
D - 4
AI 1-
5
P10
6
M
7
N10
8
M

X520 X522
1 1
DI 0 AO 0V+ V
2 2
DI 1 AO 0-
3 3
DI 2 AO 0C+ A
4 4
DI 3 AO 1V+ V
5 5
M1 AO 1-
6 6
M AO 1C+ A
7
+ Temp
X540 8 ϑ
- Temp
1
+ 24 V
2 X541
+ 24 V
P24V
3 1
+ 24 V +
4 2
+ 24 V DI/DO 8
5 DO 3
+ 24 V Out/In DI/DO 9
6 DI 5V 4
+ 24 V DI/DO 10
24V
7 5
+ 24 V DI/DO 11
8 6
+ 24 V M

X530 X542
1 1
DI 4
DO 0
2 2
DI 5
3 3
DI 6
4 4
DI 7
DO 1 V
5 5
M2
6 6
M

Fig. 4-5 Connection overview for customer terminal block TM31

SINAMICS G150
4-20 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

NOTE
The diagram of the customer terminal block shows the factory setting. The digital
inputs (terminals -X520 and -X530) in the example are powered by the internal 24
V supply of the customer terminal block (terminal -X540).

The two groups of digital inputs (optocoupler inputs) have a common reference
potential (ground reference M1 or M2). In order to close the circuit when the
internal 24 V supply is used, the ground references M1 / M2 must be connected to
internal ground (M).

If power is not supplied from the internal 24 V supply (terminal -X540), the jumper
between ground M1 and M or M2 and M must be removed in order to avoid
potential rounding.

X520: 4 Digital Inputs

Table 4-8 Terminal block X520

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data Factory Setting

1 DI 0 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V ON / OFF1
2 DI 1 Current input (typical): Motor pot. higher
10 mA at 24 V
1 2 3 4 5 6

3 DI 2 Motor pot. lower

With electrical isolation:
4 DI 3 Acknowledge error
Reference potential is terminal
5 M1 M1
6 M Level:
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to 5 V
1)
DI: digital input; M1: ground reference; M: electronic ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)
NOTE
An open-circuit input is interpreted as “low“.
Terminal M1 must be connected so that the digital inputs can function correctly.
The following solutions are possible:
1) The provided ground reference of the digital inputs, or
2) A jumper to terminal M (Important: electrical isolation for the digital inputs is
revoked as a result).

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-21
Electrical Installation 11/03

X530: 4 Digital Inputs

Table 4-9 Terminal block X530

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data Factory Setting

1 DI 4 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V Command data set
Current input (typical): selection CDS bit 0
2 DI 5 10 mA at 24 V LOCAL mode disable
1 2 3 4 5 6

3 DI 6 With electrical isolation: Reference Fixed speed setpoint

potential is terminal M2 selection bit 0
4 DI 7 High level: 15 V to 30 V Fixed speed setpoint
Low level: -3 V to 5 V selection bit 1
5 M2
6 M
1)
DI: digital input; M2: ground reference; M: electronic ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)
NOTE
An open-circuit input is interpreted as “low“.
Terminal M1 must be connected so that the digital inputs can function correctly.
The following solutions are possible:
1) The provided ground reference of the digital inputs, or
2) A jumper to terminal M (Important: electrical isolation for the digital inputs
is revoked as a result).

X521: 2 Analog Inputs (Differential Inputs)

Table 4-10 Terminal block X521

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data Factory Setting

1 AI 0+ Speed setpoint:
-10 V - +10 V, Ri = 70 kΩ
0 – 20 mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 AI 0- +4 mA - +20 mA
3 AI 1+ -20 mA - +20 mA, Ri = 250 Ω
0 mA - +20 mA
4 AI 1-
5 P10 +10 V ± 1 %, Imax 5 mA
6 M Reference potential for AI 0
7 N10 -10 V ± 1 %, Imax 5 mA
8 M Reference potential for AI 1
1)
AI: analog input; P10/N10: auxiliary voltage, M: ground reference
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)
CAUTION
The input current of the analog inputs must not exceed 35 mA when current
measurements are performed.

SINAMICS G150
4-22 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

S5: Selector for Voltage/Current AI0, AI1

Table 4-11 Selector for voltage/current S5

Switch Function Technical data

S5.0 Selector voltage/current AI0
V I S5.0
S5.1 Selector voltage/current AI1 Voltage V I S5.1
Current

X522: 2 Analog Outputs, Temperature Sensor Connection

Table 4-12 Terminal block X522

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data Factory Setting

1 AO 0 V+
2 AO 0 ref. Actual speed value:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-10 V - +10 V 0 – 20 mA
3 AO 0 A+
+4 mA - +20 mA
4 AO 1 V+ -20 mA - +20 mA
5 AO 1 ref. 0 mA - +20 mA Motor current actual
value:
6 AO 1 A+
0 – 20 mA
7 KTY+ KTY84: 0...200 °C
PTC: RPTC ≤ 1.5 kΩ
8 KTY-
1)
AO: analog output; KTY: temperature sensor connection
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)

X540: Common Auxiliary Voltage for Digital Inputs

Table 4-13 Terminal block X540

Terminal Designation Technical data Factory Setting

1 P24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 P24
3 P24
24 V DC
4 P24
Imax = 150 mA (total of all P24
5 P24
terminals)
6 P24
7 P24
8 P24

Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-23
Electrical Installation 11/03

X541: 4 Non-Floating Digital Inputs/Outputs

Table 4-14 Terminal block X541

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data Factory Setting

1 P24 As input:
2 DI/DO 8 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V DO8: ready to start
1 2 3 4 5 6

3 DI/DO 9 Current input (typical): DO9: LOCAL mode active

10 mA at 24 V DC
4 DI/DO 10 DO10: Enable pulses
As output:
5 DI/DO 11
Max. load current per output:
6 M
20 mA
Sustained short circuit proof
1)
DI/DO: digital input/output; M: electronic ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)

NOTE
An open-circuit input is interpreted as "low".

X542: 2 Relay Outputs (Two-Way Contacts)

Table 4-15 Terminal block X542

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data Factory Setting

1 DO 0.NC Max. load current: 8 A
Checkback
1 2 3 4 5 6

2 DO 0.NC Max. switching voltage:

Enable pulses
250 V AC, 30 V DC
3 DO 0.NO
Max. switching capacity:
4 DO 1.NC
at 250 V AC: 2000 VA Checkback
5 DO 1.COM at 30 V DC: 240 W (ohmic load)
No fault
6 DO 1.NO Required minimum load: 20 mA
1)
NO: normally open contact, NC: normally closed contact, COM: mid-position
contact
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

NOTE
If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs, the customer terminal block must also
be grounded via a 6 mm² protective conductor.

SINAMICS G150
4-24 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.9 Other Connections

Depending on the options installed, further connections have to be established, for
example, main contactor, connection for external auxiliary equipment, main circuit-
breaker including fuses or circuit-breaker, EMERGENCY OFF button, cabinet
illumination with service socket, cabinet anti-condensation heating, contactor
combination (EMERGENCY OFF), thermistor motor protection unit, PT100
evaluation unit and insulation monitor.
Detailed information on connecting these options with interfaces can be found in
“Additional Operating Instructions” in the documentation folder.

4.9.1 Main Contactor (Option L13)

Description
The SINAMICS G150 cabinet unit is designed as standard without a line contactor.
Option L13 (main contactor) is needed if a switching element is required for
disconnecting the cabinet from the supply (necessary with EMERGENCY OFF).
The contactor is energized and supplied within the cabinet.

Connection

Table 4-16 Terminal block X50 – checkback contact “main contactor closed“

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

4 NO Max. load current: 10 A
5 NC Max. switching voltage: 250 V AC
6 COM Max. switching capacity: 250 VA
Required minimum load: ≥1 mA
1)
NO: normally open contact, NC: normally closed contact, COM: mid-position
contact
Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-25
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.9.2 Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment (Option L19)

Description
This option includes a connection fused at max. 10 A for external auxiliary
equipment (for example, separately driven fan for motor). The voltage is tapped at
the converter input and, therefore, has the same level as the supply voltage. The
connection can be controlled internally or externally.

Connection

Table 4-17 Terminal block X155 – connection for external auxiliary equipment

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 L1
3 AC 380 – 480 V
2 L2
3 AC 660 -690 V
3 L3
11
Contactor control 230 V AC
12
13 Checkback from 230 V AC / 0.5 A
14 circuit-breaker 24 V DC / 2 A
15 Checkback from
240 V AC / 6 A
16 contactor
PE PE PE

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

Circuit Proposal for Controlling the Auxiliary Contactor from Within the
Converter
The following circuit, for example, can be used if the auxiliary contactor is to be
controlled from within the converter. The “Operation” message is then no longer
available for other purposes.

SINAMICS G150
4-26 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

N L1 -X542 -X155
-A1-X40 15 11 2 3 11 12

TM31 -K155
-A1-A60 "Operation"

Circuit proposal

Fig. 4-6 Circuit proposal for controlling the auxiliary conductor from within the converter

NOTE
If 230 V AC is applied to the relay outputs, the customer terminal block must also
be grounded via a 6 mm² protective conductor.

4.9.3 Main Circuit-Breaker incl. Fuses/Circuit-Breaker (Option L26)

Description
The main circuit-breaker of cabinet units with an output current of up to 800 A is a
load interruptor with externally mounted fuses. Cabinets with an output current
greater than 800 A are fitted with a circuit-breaker instead of a load interruptor.

Connection

Table 4-18 Terminal block X50 – checkback contact “main circuit-breaker/circuit-breaker

closed“

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 NO Max. load current: 10 A
2 NC Max. switching voltage: 250 V AC
3 COM Max. switching capacity: 250 VA
Required minimum load: ≥1 mA
1)
NO: normally open contact, NC: normally closed contact, COM: mid-position
contact
Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-27
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.9.4 EMERGENCY OFF Button (Option L45)

Description
The EMERGENCY OFF button with protective collar is integrated in the door of the
cabinet unit. The contacts of the button are connected to terminal block –X120.
Category 0 and 1 EMERGENCY OFF functions can be activated in conjunction
with options L57, L59, and L60.
A braking unit may be necessary to achieve the required shutdown times.

Connection

Table 4-19 Terminal block X120 – checkback contact “EMERGENCY OFF button in
cabinet door“

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 NC Checkback contacts of EMERGENCY OFF button in
cabinet door
2 NC
Max. load current: 10 A
3 NC 2)
Max. switching voltage: 250 V AC
4 NC 2)
Max. switching capacity: 250 VA
Required minimum load: ≥1 mA
1)
NC: normally closed contact
2)
Factory setting in converter for options L57, L59, and L60
Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

SINAMICS G150
4-28 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.9.5 Cabinet Illumination with Service Socket (Option L50)

Description
One universal lamp with an integrated service socket is installed for each cabinet
panel. The power supply for the cabinet illumination and socket must be provided
externally and fused at max. 10 A. The cabinet illumination is switched on manually
via a slide switch or automatically by means of an integrated motion detector. The
mode is switch-selected.

Connection

Table 4-20 Terminal block X390 – connection for cabinet illumination with service socket

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 L1
2 N 230 V AC
3 PE

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

4.9.6 Cabinet Anti-Condensation Heating (Option L55)

Description
The anti-condensation heating is used at low ambient temperatures and high levels
of humidity to prevent condensation forming.
A 100-W heater is installed for a 400 mm and 600 mm cabinet panel, and 2 100-W
heaters for an 800/1000 and 1200 mm cabinet panel. The power supply for the
heating (110 V – 230 V AC) must be provided externally and fused at max. 16 A.

Connection

Table 4-21 Terminal block X240 – connection for cabinet anti-condensation heating

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 L1 110 V -230 V AC
2 N power supply
3 PE Protective conductor

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-29
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.9.7 EMERGENCY OFF Category 0; 230 V AC or 24 V DC (Option L57)

Description
EMERGENCY OFF category 0 for uncontrolled stop to EN 60 204. This function
involves disconnecting the cabinet from the supply via the line contactor bypassing
the electronics by means of a safety combination to EN 60 204-1. The motor then
coasts to a stop. To prevent the main contactor from switching under load, a pulse
block is triggered at the same time via an external fault. A restart is only possible
after the fault has been acknowledged. The operational status is indicated by
means of three LEDs.
In the factory setting, this version is set with a 230 V AC button circuit.

Connection

Table 4-22 Terminal X120 – connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 0, 230 V AC and
24 V DC

Terminal 230 V AC and 24 V DC button circuit

7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from system side,
8 remove jumper 7-8
15 "On" for monitored start:
16 remove jumper 15–16 and connect button
17
Checkback "trip safety combination"
18

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

Reconnection to the 24 V DC Button Circuit

When using the 24 V DC button circuit, you must remove the following jumpers at
terminal X120:
4-5, 9-10, and 11-14
You must also insert the following jumpers at terminal X120:
4-11, 5-10, and 9-14

Diagnostics
Messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs) are
described in “Additional Operating Instructions” in the operating manual.

SINAMICS G150
4-30 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.9.8 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1; 230 V AC (Option L59)

Description
EMERGENCY OFF category 1 for controlled stop to EN 60 204. This function
involves stopping the drive by means of a rapid stop using a deceleration ramp that
can be parameterized by the user. The cabinet unit is then disconnected from the
supply via the line contactor bypassing the electronics by means of a safety
combination to EN 60 204-1. A braking unit may be necessary to achieve the
required shutdown times.
The operational status is indicated by a total of eight LEDs.

Connection

Table 4-23 Terminal block X120 – connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (230 V
AC)

Terminal Technical data

7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from system side,
8 remove jumper 7-8
15 "On" for monitored start:
16 remove jumper 15–16 and connect button
17
Checkback "trip safety combination"
18

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

Setting
When the emergency stop function (OFF3 ramp-down time, p1135) is used to shut
down the drive, the ramp-down time should be less than (or at the most equal to)
the time set on the contactor combination, after which the converter is de-
energized.

Diagnostics
Messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs) are
described in “Additional Operating Instructions” in the operating manual.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-31
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.9.9 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1; 24 V DC (Option L60)

Description
EMERGENCY OFF category 1 for controlled stop to EN 60 204. This function
involves stopping the drive by means of a rapid stop using a deceleration ramp that
can be parameterized by the user. The cabinet unit is then disconnected from the
supply via the line contactor bypassing the electronics by means of a safety
combination to EN 60 204-1. A braking unit may be necessary to achieve the
required shutdown times.
The operational status is indicated by means of five LEDs.

Connection

Table 4-24 Terminal block X120 – connection for EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (24 V
DC)

Terminal Button circuit 24 V DC

7 Loop in EMERGENCY OFF button from system side,
8 remove jumper 7-8
15 "On" for monitored start:
16 remove jumper 15–16 and connect button
17
Checkback "trip safety combination"
18

Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm² (AWG 10)

Setting
When the emergency stop function (OFF3 ramp-down time, p1135) is used to shut
down the drive, the ramp-down time should be less than (or at the most equal to)
the time set on the contactor combination, after which the converter is de-
energized.

Diagnostics
Messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs) are
described in “Additional Operating Instructions” in the operating manual.

SINAMICS G150
4-32 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

4.9.10 100 kW Braking Unit (Option L61); 200 kW Braking Unit (Option
L62)

Description
Braking units are used when regenerative energy occurs occasionally and briefly,
for example when the brake is applied to the drive (emergency stop). The braking
units comprise a chopper power unit and a load resistor, which must be attached
externally. A thermostat, which is integrated in the shutdown train of the cabinet
unit, is installed in the braking resistor to monitor it.

Table 4-25 Load data for the braking units

Line voltage Cont. Chopper Rated chopper Peak Braking Max. current
chopper power power chopper resistor
power P20 power
PDB P40 P15 RB
380 V – 480 V 25 kW 50 kW 100 kW 125 kW 4.4 Ω ± 7.5 % 189 A
380 V – 480 V 50 kW 100 kW 200 kW 250 kW 2.2 Ω ± 7.5 % 378 A
660 V – 690 V 25 kW 50 kW 100 kW 125 kW 9.8 Ω ± 7.5 % 127 A
660 V – 690 V 50 kW 100 kW 200 kW 250 kW 4.9 Ω ± 7.5 % 255 A

Installing the Braking Resistor

The braking resistor should not be installed in the vicinity of the converter. The
maximum cable length between the cabinet unit and the braking resistor is 50 m.
Sufficient space must be available for dissipating the energy converted by the
braking resistor. There must be sufficient clearance to flammable objects. The
braking resistor must installed as a free-standing unit. Objects must not be placed
on or anywhere above the braking resistor.

CAUTION
A ventilation clearance of 200 m must be maintained on all sides of the braking
resistor (with ventilation grilles).

Table 4-26 Braking resistor dimensions

Unit 100 kW resistor (option L61) 200 kW resistor (option L62)

Length mm 740 810
Width mm 485 485
Height mm 605 1325

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-33
Electrical Installation 11/03

T1/T2
Type plate
screw terminal
M12 2,5 mm²

601
57
177
M50 2x
160
Ground threaded bolt M8
connection M8 150
70

66 40
52,5 380 52,5 710
740

Fig. 4-7 Dimension drawing of the braking resistor for option L61

Type plate

1321

2 x threaded bolt
M12 M10
70
M50 T1/T2
140
screw terminal
Ground 93 2,5 mm²
connection 112 70 60
M10 52,5 380 52,5 710
740

Fig. 4-8 Dimension drawing of the braking resistor for option L62

SINAMICS G150
4-34 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

Connecting the Braking Resistor

WARNING
The cables must only be connected to terminal block -X5 when the cabinet unit is
switched off and the DC link capacitors are discharged.

CAUTION
The braking resistor cables must be laid in such a way that they are short-circuit
and ground-fault proof!
The length of the connection cables between the cabinet unit and external braking
resistor must not exceed 50 m.

Table 4-27 Terminal block X5 – connection for external braking resistor

Terminal Function description

R1 Braking resistor connection
R2 Braking resistor connection

Max. connectable cross-section: 70 mm² (AWG 000)

Recommended cable cross-sections:
• For L61 (100 kW): 35 mm² (AWG 0)
• For L62 (200 kW): 50 mm² (AWG 00)

Table 4-28 Installing the thermostat for the external braking resistor in the monitoring train
of the cabinet unit

Terminal Function description

T1 Thermostat connection: connection with terminal X541:1 (P24 V)
T2 Thermostat connection: connection with terminal X541:5 (DI11)

Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-35
Electrical Installation 11/03

Cabinet Unit Settings

If the braking resistor thermostat is connected to digital input 11, appropriate
settings have to be made so that the drive is brought to a standstill if a fault occurs.
Once the device has been successfully commissioned, you have to make the
following changes:
Setting the "Expert" access level on the operator panel
"Expert" access level <Key pushbutton> - <access level> - set "Expert" and confirm -
enter activation code "47".

MENU - Settings - Data Set Selection - Command Data Set -

Activate CDS 0
Set (CDS) to "0".
The following query is displayed: "Save data in drive too?".
Choose "No".
For PROFIBUS operation:
p2108[0] = (03) 4022.11
Connect "External Fault 3" to DI 11.

MENU - Settings - Data Set Selection - Command Data Set

Activate CDS 1
Set (CDS) to "1".
The following query is displayed: "Save data in drive too?".
Choose "No".
For operation via terminal strip:
p2108[1] = (03) 4022.11
Connect "External Fault 3" to DI 11.

Blocking the Vdc-max controller

p1240 = 0
The vdc-max controller must be switched off when the brake
chopper is used.
Fig. 4-9 Activating the connection for "External Fault 3"

Diagnostics
If the thermostat is opened due to a thermal overload on the braking resistor, fault
F7862 ("External Fault 3") is triggered and the drive is switched off with OFF2.
The braking chopper is not monitored using the software because it has a self-
protection function. It can be monitored using the status bit for digital input 4
(parameter r0721.4):
• r0721.4 = 1: Chopper is functioning properly
• r0721.4 = 0: Chopper is malfunctioning
You can acknowledge malfunctions by pressing the "Acknowledge" key on the
operator panel (when the DC link voltage is present).

SINAMICS G150
4-36 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

Duty Cycles

P/P20 PDB = Continuous braking power

P15 = 5 x PDB = Power permissible every 90s for 15s
P20 = 4 x PDB = Power permissible every 90s for 20s
1.50 P40 = 2 x PDB = Power permissible every 90s for 40s

P15 1.25

P20 1.00

0.75

P40 0.50

PDB 0.25

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 t/s

Fig. 4-10 Duty cycles for the braking resistors

Threshold Switch
The response threshold at which the braking unit is activated and the DC link
voltage generated during braking are specified in the following table.

WARNING
The threshold switch must only be used when the cabinet unit is switched off and
the DC link capacitors are discharged.

Table 4-29 Response thresholds for the braking units

Rated voltage Response Switch Comments

threshold position
774 V 1 774 V is the default factory setting. With supply voltages of
between 380 V and 400 V, the response threshold can be set
to 673 V to reduce the voltage stress on the motor and
380 V -480 V converter. This does, however, reduce the possible peak
673 V 2
power (P15) with the square of the voltage (677/774)² = 0.75.
The possible peak power is, therefore, max. 75 % of P15.
1158 V is the default factory setting. With a supply voltage of
660 V, the response threshold can be set to 1070 V to reduce
the voltage stress on the motor and converter. This does,
660 V -690 V 1158 V 1 however, reduce the possible peak power (P15) with the
square of the voltage (1070/1158)² = 0.85.
The possible peak power is, therefore, max. 85 % of P15.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-37
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.9.11 Thermistor Motor Protection Unit (Option L83/L84)

Description
This option includes the thermistor motor protection unit (with PTB approval) for
PTC thermistor sensors (PTC resistor type A) for warning and shutdown. The
power supply for the thermistor motor protection unit is provided inside the
converter where the evaluation is also performed.

Connection

Table 4-30 F127/F125 – connection for thermistor motor protection unit

Equipment designation Function description

F127 T1, T2 Thermistor motor protection (warning)
F125 T1, T2 Thermistor motor protection (shutdown)

The PTC thermistor sensors are connected directly to terminals T1 and T2 of the
evaluation unit.

Table 4-31 Maximal line length for the sensor circuit

Line cross-section in mm² Line length in m

2.5 2 x 2800
1.5 2 x 1500
0.5 2 x 500

Diagnostics
Messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs) are
described in "Additional Operating Instructions" in the operating manual.

4.9.12 PT100 Evaluation Unit (Option L86)

Description

NOTE
The PT100 evaluation unit and the parameters for the measurement channels are
described in "Additional Operating Instructions".

The PT100 evaluation unit can monitor up to 6 sensors. The sensors can be
connected using a two-wire or three-wire system. With the two-wire system, inputs
Tx1 and Tx3 must be assigned. With the three-wire system, input Tx2 must also be

SINAMICS G150
4-38 Operating Manual
11/03 Electrical Installation

connected (x = 1, 2, ...6). The limit values can be programmed by the user for each
channel.
In the factory setting, the measurement channels are divided into two groups of
three channels. With motors, for example, three PT100 can, therefore, be
monitored in the stator windings and two PT100 in the motor bearings. Channels
that are not used can be masked out using appropriate parameter settings.
The output relays are integrated in the internal fault and warning train of the
cabinet unit. The messages can also be picked up by the customer via two spare
fault signaling relays. Two user-programmable analog outputs are also available
(0/4 to 20 mA and 0/2 to 10 V) for integration in a higher-level controller.

Connection

Table 4-32 Terminal block -A1-A140 – connection for evaluation unit PT100 resistors

Terminal Designation Technical data

T11-T13 90 – 240 V AC/DC; PT100; sensor 1; group 1
T21-T23 90 – 240 V AC/DC; PT100; sensor 2; group 1
T31-T33 90 – 240 V AC/DC; PT100; sensor 3; group 1
T41-T43 90 – 240 V AC/DC; PT100; sensor 1; group 2
T51-T53 90 – 240 V AC/DC; PT100; sensor 2; group 2
T61-T63 90 – 240 V AC/DC; PT100; sensor 3; group 2
51/52/54 90 – 240 V AC/DC
relay output limit value group 1 reached; (two-way
contact)
61/62/64 90 – 240 V AC/DC
relay output limit value group 2 reached; (two-way
contact)
Ground _ OUT 1 0/4 – 20 mA
0/2 – 10 V
U1 OUT 1
analog output Out 1; sensor group 1
I1 OUT 1
Ground _ OUT 2 0/4 – 20 mA
0/2 – 10 V
U2 OUT 2
analog output Out 2; sensor group 2
I2 OUT 2

Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

Diagnostics
Messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs) are
described in "Additional Operating Instructions" in the operating manual.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 4-39
Electrical Installation 11/03

4.9.13 Insulation Monitor (Option L87))

Description
This device monitors the complete electrically connected circuit for insulation faults.
The insulation resistance as well as all the insulation faults that occur in the DC link
and on the motor side of the cabinet are detected. Two response values (between
1 kΩ ...10 MΩ) can be set. If a response value in undershot, a warning is output to
the terminal. A system fault is output via the signaling relay system.
When the cabinet unit is delivered from the plant, the plant configuration (one or
several loads in one electrically connected network) and the protection philosophy
(immediate shutdown in the event of an insulation fault or restricted continued
motion) can vary. This means that the signaling relays of the insulation monitor are
not integrated in the fault and warning train. These relay outputs would have to be
integrated in the fault/warning train of the cabinet unit on the system side providing
the plant configuration and protection philosophy permit this.

IMPORTANT
Only one insulation monitor can be used in an electrically connected network.

Connection

Table 4-33 Terminal block A1-A101 – connection for one insulation monitor

Terminal Technical data

11 Signaling relay ALARM 1 (mid-position contact)
12 Signaling relay ALARM 1 (NC contact)
14 Signaling relay ALARM 1 (NO contact)
21 Signaling relay ALARM 2 (mid-position contact)
22 Signaling relay ALARM 2 (NC contact)
24 Signaling relay ALARM 2 (NO contact)
M+ External kΩ display, analog output (0 µA ... 400 µA)
M- External kΩ display, analog output (0 µA ... 400 µA)
R1 External reset key (NC contact or wire jumper otherwise the fault code is not stored)
R2 External reset key (NC contact or wire jumper)
T1 External test button
T2 External test button
Max. connectable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

Diagnostics
Messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs) are
described in "Additional Operating Instructions" in the operating manual.

SINAMICS G150
4-40 Operating Manual
Commissioning
5

5
5.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• An overview of the operator panel functions
• Initial commissioning of the cabinet (initialization)
– Entering the motor data (drive commissioning)
– Entering the most important parameters (basic commissioning), concluding
with the motor ID
• Data backup
• Resetting parameters to the factory settings

6 7 5
Setpoint channel Closed-loop control

Cabinet operator panel

M
~

PROFIBUS 8

Input terminals Output terminals

-A60 -A60

10 9
Diagnosis Faults / alarms Monitoring Functions Protective functions

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 5-1
Commissioning 11/03

5.2 The Operator Panel

Description
An operator panel is located in the cabinet door of the converter for operation,
monitoring, and commissioning tasks. It has the following features:
• Graphical LCD with backlighting for plain-text display and a "bar display" of
process variables
• LEDs for displaying the operational statuses
• Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults and alarms
• Keypad for controlling drives during operation
• LOCAL/REMOTE switchover for selecting the control terminal (master control
assigned to operator panel or customer terminal block / PROFIBUS)
• Numeric keypad for entering setpoint or parameter values
• Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus
• Two-stage security concept to protect against accidental or unauthorized
changes to settings
• Degree of protection IP 54 (when installed)

Operating status Display

LEDs:

ON (green)

Alarm (yellow)

Fault (red)

5 function keys

Master control
Menu key (select)

Direction reversal
Keyboard lock
Increase / Decrease

Numeric keypad ON / OFF Jog

Fig. 5-1 Components of the cabinet operator panel

SINAMICS G150
5-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Commissioning

5.3 Initial Commissioning

5.3.1 Initial Ramp-Up

Start Screen
When the system is switched on for the first time, the control unit (CPU) is
initialized automatically. The following screen is displayed:

s SINAMICS

Initialisierung: CPU-Start ....

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
Fig. 5-2 Initial screen

While the system is ramping up, the internal statuses are displayed in the bottom
line of the operator panel.
Once the system has successfully ramped up, the drive has to be commissioned
when the system is switched on for the first time after it has been delivered. The
converter can then be switched on.
When the system is then ramped up again, it can be operated immediately.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 5-3
Commissioning 11/03

5.3.2 Basic Commissioning

Entering the Motor Data

During initial commissioning, you have to enter motor data using the operator
panel. Use the data shown on the motor type plate.

p0304 p0305

S
3 ~MOT. 1LA8 315-4PM80 315 No N- 1107840010001/2002 IMB3
V Hz A kW cosϕ 1/min IA/IN TE s Certif. IP
400 50 405 235 0,87 1485 No 55
690 235

Rotor SQU.CAGE KL 13 EN/IEC 60034-1 Gew/Wt 1,3 t

NMAX=3000 1/MIN

DEW0233

MADE IN GERMANY

p0310 p0307 p0308 p0311

Fig. 5-3 Example of a motor type plate

Table 5-4 Motor data

Parameter no. Values Unit

System of units for line frequency and entering p0100 0 IEC [50 Hz / kW]
motor data 1 NEMA [60 Hz / hp]
Motor:
Rated voltage p0304 [V]
Rated current p0305 [A]
Rated output p0307 [kW] / [hp]
Rated power factor Cos ϕ (at p0100 = 0 only) p0308
Rated efficiency η (at p0100 = 1 only) p0309 [%]
Rated frequency p0310 [Hz]
Rated speed p0311 [min-1] / [rpm]

SINAMICS G150
5-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Commissioning

Basic Commissioning: Selecting the Motor Type

Motortype select.(IEC/NEMA) In the first dialog screen, select the line frequency
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx and motor data in kW or hp.
p0100 = 0: IEC [50 Hz / kW]
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Change the values with <F4>
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Confirm the values with <F5>
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Help Change OK

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

p0100 Sel. Mot. IEC/NEMA Defined as follows:

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 0: line frequency 50 Hz, motor data in kW
p0100 : 0: IEC [50 Hz / kW] 1: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data in hp
1: NEMA [60 Hz / hp]
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx With <F2> and <F3> you can select the possible
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx settings.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Help Cancel OK Press <F4> to abort motor selection
Press <F5> to confirm the setting.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Motor data Entering motor data specified on the type plate

Back
p0304 MOT.V_Rated 400.0 V Change the values with <F4>:
p0305 MOT.I_Rated 405.0 A A screen appears in which you can enter the
p0307 MOT.P_Rated 235.0 kW respective values.
p0308 MOT.CosPhi_Rated 0.870
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Press <Back> to return to the previous dialog screen
Help Change OK

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Motor data
Back Once you have set the values, press <F5> to confirm
p03079MOT.P_Rated 235.0 kW them. The confirmed values are displayed with a tick
p03089MOT.CosPhi_Rated 0.870 9 behind the parameter number.
p03109MOT.f_Rated 50.0 Hz
p03119MOT.n_Rated 1485.0 min-1 Once you have set and confirmed all the values,
xxxxxxxxxxxx press <F5> to continue with basic commissioning.
Help Change Continue

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Bild 5-5 Selecting the motor type and entering the motor data

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 5-5
Commissioning 11/03

Basic Commissioning: Entering the Basic Parameters

Basic commisioning Entering the parameters for basic

Back commissioning
p1070 Main setpoint (03)r4055[00]
p1075 Additional setp. 0% p1070 Main setpoint (03)r4055[00] means:
p1080 Minimum speed 0.000 min-1
p1082 Maximum Speed 1500.000 min-1 In the factory setting, the main setpoint (p1070) is
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx defaulted by analog input 0 (parameter r4055[00]) on
Help Change Continue the customer terminal block (node address 03).

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Press <F3> and <F2> to select the basic

parameters.

Basic commisioning
Back
p1082 Maximum Speed 1500.000 min-1 Press <F4> to change the values:
p1120 RG.t_Ramp_Up 20.00 s The system displays a screen in which you can enter
p1121 RG.t_Ramp-Down 30.00 s the relevant values.
p1135 RG.t_OFF3 30.00 s
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Press <F5> to continue.
Help Change Continue

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Final confirmation Final confirmation

ttt
Apply parameters permanently with OK Confirm the basic parameters to save them.

Press <Back> to return to the previous dialog screen

Press <F5> to continue.

Help Back OK The entered basic parameters are permanently

stored and the necessary calculations for the control
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 are carried out.

Motor identification Motor identification

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Please switch on the drive to start You activate this function by pressing the LOCAL
motor identification. key (wait until the LED in the LOCAL key lights up)
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx and then ON.
Warning: The motor conducts current and
may cause the shaft to turn. If you abort the motor ID function (<F4>), the motor
Help Alarm Cancel control does not operate with the measured values
but with the motor characteristic values calculated
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 from the type plate data. The measurement
increases the control performance as deviations in
the electrical characteristic values are minimized on
account of deviations in the material properties and
manufacturing tolerances.

Fig. 5-6 Basic commissioning – Further dialog screens, concluding with the motor ID

SINAMICS G150
5-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Commissioning

NOTE on Improving Closed-Loop Control

A marked improvement in closed-loop control can be achieved if you know the
rated magnetization current of the motor and enter it after commissioning.

"Expert" access level Setting "Expert" access level on the operator panel
Set <key pushbutton> - <access level> - "Expert" and confirm
(enter activation code "47")
In no-load operation and when the load is not connected,
Switch on drive
increase the speed to 80 % of the rated motor speed:
- Activate LOCAL mode
- Switch on
- Use the "increase" key to set the speed to 80 % of the rated
motor speed (press <F2> in the operation screen to call up
the mode for entering speed directly and enter the required
speed).
Reading the current in parameter r0027
r0027 =
This is displayed in the lower bar display on the operator panel.

Switch the motor off and allow it to coast to a standstill (wait

Switch off motor
until the status "ready to operate" is displayed in the top left of
the operator panel).
Entering the rated magnetization current
p0320 =
Enter the value read in r0027 in p0320

Storing the parameters

p0977 = 1
All the parameter settings will be stored on the CompactFlash
Card.

Fig. 5-7 Procedure for improving closed-loop control

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 5-7
Commissioning 11/03

5.4 Status After Commissioning

Once drive and basic commissioning have been carried out using the parameters
specified in Chapter 5.3.2, you can operate the cabinet unit as follows:

REMOTE Mode 1 (Control via Terminal Block)

• Control (ON/OFF) is carried out via terminal X520:1.
• The speed setpoint is specified as a current in the range 0 to 20 mA via analog
input 0 at terminals X521:1 and 2.
An input current of 20 mA is equal to the maximum speed in p1082 entered
during basic commissioning.

REMOTE Mode 0 (Control via PROFIBUS)

• Control (ON/OFF) is carried out via control word 1, bit 0.
• The speed setpoint is specified via the PROFIBUS setpoint (displayed in
r2050[01]).
A setpoint of 100% is equal to the maximum speed in p1082 entered during
basic commissioning.

Switching Between Remote Mode 0 and 1

• Switching between REMOTE mode 0 and REMOTE mode 1 is carried out via
terminal X530:1. In the factory setting, REMOTE mode 1 (control via terminal
block) is active.

LOCAL Mode (Control via Operator Panel)

• You switch to LOCAL mode by pressing the "LOCAL/REMOTE" key.
Switching can be blocked by applying a HIGH signal at terminal X530:2.
• Control (ON/OFF) is carried out via the "ON" and "OFF" keys.
• You specify the setpoint using the "increase" and "decrease" keys or by
entering the appropriate numbers using the numeric keypad.

Analog Outputs
• The actual speed (r0063) is output as a current output in the range 0 to 20 mA
at analog output 0 (X522:2 and 3).
A current of 20 mA is equal to the maximum speed in p1082.
• The actual current value (r0068) is output as a current output in the range 0 to
20 mA at analog output 1 (X522:5 and 6).
A current of 20 mA is equal to the current limit (p0640) set to 1.5 x rated motor
current (p0305).

SINAMICS G150
5-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Commissioning

Digital Outputs
• The "Enable pulses" signal is output at digital output 0 (X542:2 and 3).
• The "no fault" signal is output at digital output 1 (X542:5 and 6) (fail safe).
• The "ready to start" signal is output at digital output 8 (X541:2).
• The "LOCAL mode active" signal is output at digital output 9 (X541:3).
• The "Enable pulses" signal is output at digital output 10 (X541:4).

Vdc-max Controller is Active (p1240 = 1)

If the ramp-down time is too short and the permitted DC link voltage is violated
when the drive is decelerated, the ramp-down time is automatically increased so
that the cabinet unit does not have to be shut down with the error "overvoltage in
DC link".

Flying Restart Function is Active (p1200 = 1)

When the drive is switched on, the motor may be rotating:
• due to external influences (water flow for pumps, air from fan drives)
• due to a previous shutdown or power failure, whereby the kinetic energy stored
causes the drive to coast to a standstill slowly.
When the flying restart function is activated, the output frequency of the converter
is varied until the current motor speed is found. The motor then ramps up in
accordance with the settings for the ramp-up generator until the defined setpoint is
reached.

5.5 Data Backup

5.5.1 Saving the CompactFlash Card Parameter Settings

After commissioning, you are advised to store the CompactFlash Card data on an
external storage medium (hard disk, data media).
To do so, use a card reader connected to a PC. Ensure that all the files and
directories are stored in the same form as on the CompactFlash card.
If required, you can restore the device status after the drive has been
commissioned by transferring the stored data to the CompactFlash card.

NOTE
You should only remove the CompactFlash card when the system is switched off.
If you remove it while the system is switched on, warning A1100 ("CompactFlash
Card removed") is output.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 5-9
Commissioning 11/03

5.5.2 Restoring the Saved Configuration

To restore the saved configuration, you have to delete all the files on the
CompactFlash card and transfer the saved copy to the CompactFlash card.

IMPORTANT
When you delete the files on the CompactFlash card, the saved drive parameters
are permanently lost!
When re-importing the saved files, you must ensure that none of the files in the
"User" sub-folder on the CompactFlash card has a write-protection attribute. This
can occur, for example, if the copy of the CompactFlash card was stored
temporarily on a CD.
The CompactFlash card directory must be structured in the same way as before. If
you move individual files to sub-folders, you may not be able to use the
CompactFlash card.

5.6 Resetting Parameters to the Factory Settings

The factory settings represent the defined original status of the cabinet unit on
delivery.
Resetting the parameters to the factory settings means that all the parameter
settings made since the system was delivered are reset.

"Extended" access level Setting the "Extended" access level on the operator panel
Set <key pushbutton> - <access level> - <"Extended">

Setting the parameter filter to "Parameter reset"

p0009 = 30
<MENU> <device commissioning> <select>
Set p0009 = 30 in the following dialog screen
Resetting all the parameters to the factory settings
p0976 =
All the cabinet unit parameters are reset the SINAMICS G150
factory settings
- 380 V - 480 V, 110 kW - 250 kW: p0976 = 20
- 380 V - 480 V, 315 kW - 560 kW: p0976 = 21
- 660 V - 690 V, 75 kW - 800 kW: p0976 = 22
Saving the parameters
Press OK
When you press F5 (OK), all the parameter settings are set to
the factory setting and saved to the CompactFlash Card.
The system has finished saving the data when the text "busy ..."
in the status bar is no longer displayed.

POWER ON
POWER ON
To activate the parameter reset to factory setting, switch the
power supply off and then on again.

Fig. 5-8 Procedure for resetting parameters to the factory settings

SINAMICS G150
5-10 Operating Manual
Operation
6

6
6.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• Control via the operator panel
• Control via the terminal block
• Control via PROFIBUS

6 7 5
Setpoint channel Closed-loop control

Cabinet operator panel

M
~

PROFIBUS 8

Input terminals Output terminals

-A60 -A60

10 9
Diagnosis Faults / alarms Monitoring Functions Protective functions

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-1
Operation 11/03

Control Sources
The system can be controlled via the operator panel, terminal block, or PROFIBUS.
Control via PROFIBUS

LOCAL disable
"LOCAL/REMOTE" key

&
r0807 - Master control active
0: REMOTE -
PROFIBUS / Terminal block
1: LOCAL - Operator panel
Cabinet operator panel 1
internal controller
0

1
PROFIBUS
r0050 - Active CDS
0: PROFIBUS - REMOTE 0
1: Terminal block - REMOTE 1

PROFIBUS / X530.1
Terminal block
X530.2
LOCAL disable LOCAL disable

Terminal block

Fig. 6-1 Control sources

Priority
The priority of the control sources is shown in Fig. 6-1.

NOTE
Emergency OFF signals (L57, L59, L60) and motor protection signals (L83, L84)
are always active (regardless of the control source).

SINAMICS G150
6-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.2 Control via the Operator Panel

6.2.1 Operator Panel (AOP30) Overview

Description
The operator panel can be used for the following activities:
• Parameterization (commissioning)
• Monitoring status variables
• Controlling the drive
• Diagnosing faults and alarms
All the functions can be accessed via a menu.
Your starting point is the main menu, which you can always call up using the yellow
MENU key:

M a i n m e n u Dialog screen for the main menu:

Operation Screen Press the "MENU" key to access this from anywhere
Parameterization in the system.
Fault memory / Alarm memory
Settings
AOP30 - diagnosic

Help Select.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

M a i n m e n u Press "F2" and "F3" to navigate through the menu

Fault memory / Alarm memory options in the main menu.
Settings
AOP30 - diagnosic
Drive commisioning
Device commisioning

Help Select.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Fig. 6-2 Main menu

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-3
Operation 11/03

6.2.2 Menu Structure of the Operator Panel

MENU Main menu Operation screen Act. Fault *) *) Help texts can be called
up for all alarms and
Act Alarm *) faults

Parameterization All parameters

Parameter groups...
Fault memory *)
View fault memory
Alarm memory *)
View alarm memory

Settings Data set select

Control settings

Display settings
Define operating
screen

Set date / time

Language switch

Reset system settings

Software /
AOP30-Diagnostic
database version
Battery status
Drive
commisioning Communication

Keyboard
Device
commisioning

Safety locks Operat. lock

Parameteriz. lock

Access level

Fig. 6-3 Menu structure of the operator panel

SINAMICS G150
6-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.2.2.1 Operation Screen Menu

Description
The operation screen displays the most important status variables for the cabinet
units:
It displays the operating status of the drive, the direction of rotation, the time, as
well as four drive variables (parameters) numerically and two in the form of a bar
display for continuous monitoring.
You can call up the operation screen in one of three ways:
1. After the power supply has been switched on and the system has ramped up.
2. If you do not make any entries for two minutes, the system calls up the
operation screen automatically.
3. By pressing the MENU key twice and then F5 OK

Operation 12:25:30 S
N SET= 1450.000min¹ F_OUT= 50.0Hz
P_ACT= 235.0kW Vdc = 620.0V
N_ACT[min¹]
1450.0 0% 50% 100%
I_ACT[A ]
450.0 0% 50% 100%

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

If a fault occurs, the system automatically displays the fault screen (see Section
6.2.4).
In LOCAL control mode, you can choose to enter the setpoint numerically (F2:
setpoint).

Settings
When you choose Settings – Define operation screen, you can adjust the type of
display and the values displayed as required.
See Section 6.2.2.3

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-5
Operation 11/03

6.2.2.2 Parameterization Menu

In the parameterization menu, you can adjust the cabinet unit settings.
Parameters are also arranged in function groups so that you can find them more
easily. You can, however, call up a list displaying all the parameters.
In both cases, the parameters displayed depend on the access level that has been
set. You can set the access level in the menu for inhibit functions, which you can
call up by pressing the key pushbutton.

6.2.2.3 Menu Settings

Selecting Data Sets

In this menu, you select the active data set for displaying and processing
parameters which, although relevant to both REMOTE mode 0 and 1, can be set
differently.
For example, the main setpoint for terminal operation (p1070[1], REMOTE mode 1)
and the main setpoint for PROFIBUS operation (p1070[0], REMOTE mode 0) can
be set via two separate command data sets.
The command data set that must be activated for setting the relevant main setpoint
is indicated in square parentheses [].
In the factory setting, command data set 1 is active.

Control Settings
This defines the settings for the control keys in LOCAL mode.
See Section 6.2.3.

Display Settings
In this menu, you set the lighting, brightness, and contrast for the display.

Defining the Operation Screen

In this menu, you can switch between four operation screens. By pressing F3 –
"Values", you can set the parameters that are to be displayed.

SINAMICS G150
6-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

Define operating screen Define operating screen

10 values digital Entry 01 : (02)r1114

8 values digital and 1 bars Entry 02 : (02)r0024
4 values digital and 2 bars Entry 03 : (02)r0032
3 bars Entry 04 : (02)r0026

Help Values Cancel OK Help Back Change

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
Fig. 6-4 Defining the operation screen

The following image shows how the entries are assigned to the screen positions:

OPERATION 12:25:30 S OPERATION 12:25:30 S

Entry 01 Entry 02
Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 03 Entry 04
Entry 03 Entry 04 Entry 05 Entry 06
Entry 05 Entry 06 Entry 07 Entry 08
Entry 07 Entry 08 Entry 09
Entry 09 Entry 10 0% 50% 100%

OPERATION 12:25:30 S OPERATION 12:25:30 S

Entry 01 Entry 02 Entry 01
Entry 03 Entry 04 0% 50% 100%
Entry 05 Entry 02
0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%
Entry 06 Entry 03
0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Fig. 6-5 Position of the entries in the operation screen

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-7
Operation 11/03

List of Signals for the Operation Screen

Table 6-1 List of signals for the operation screen

Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling (100 % = ...)

(see Table 6-2)
Factory Setting (entry no.)
Speed setpoint upstream of ramp r1114 N_SET 1/min p2000
generator (1)
Output frequency (2) r0024 F_OUT Hz Reference frequency
Output smoothed (3) r0032 P_ACT kW r2004
DC link voltage smoothed (4) r0026 VDC V p2001
Actual speed smoothed (5) r0021 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Absolute actual current smoothed (6) r0027 I_ACT A p2002
Motor temperature (7) r0035 T_MOT °C Reference
temperature
Converter temperature (8) r0037 T_LT °C Reference
temperature
Actual torque smoothed (9) r0031 M_ACT Nm p2003
Converter output voltage smoothed (10) r0025 V_OUT V p2001
For diagnostic purposes
Speed setpoint smoothed r0020 N_SET 1/min p2000
Control factor smoothed r0028 % Reference control
factor
Field-producing current component r0029 A p2002
Torque-producing current component r0030 A p2002
Converter overload r0036 % 100 % = Shutdown
Degree of thermal overload
Speed setpoint downstream of filter r0062 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Actual speed after smoothing r0063 N_ACT 1/min p2000
Control deviation r0064 1/min p2000
Slip frequency r0065 Hz Reference frequency
Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequency
Output voltage r0072 V_ACT V p2001
Control factor r0074 % Reference control
factor
Torque-producing actual current r0078 A p2002
Actual torque value r0080 Nm p2003
For further diagnostic purposes
Fixed speed setpoint active r1024 1/min p2000
Active motor potentiometer setpoint r1050 1/min p2000
Resulting speed setpoint r1119 1/min p2000
Speed controller output r1508 Nm p2003
I component of speed controller r1482 Nm p2003
PROFIBUS setpoint r2050 1/min p2000
Analog input 0 [V, mA] r4052[0] V, mA V: 100 V
mA: 100 mA
Analog input 1 [V, mA] r4052[1] V, mA V: 100 V
mA: 100 mA
Analog input 0, scaled r4055[0] % V: 10 V
mA: 20 mA
Analog input 1, scaled r4055[1] % V: 10 V
mA: 20 mA

SINAMICS G150
6-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

Scaling

Table 6-2 Scaling

Variable Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning

Reference speed 100 % = p2000 p2000 = Maximum speed (p1082)
Reference voltage 100 % = p2001 p2001 = 1000 V
Reference current 100 % = p2002 p2002 = Current limit (p0640)
Reference torque 100 % = p2003 p2003 = 2 x rated motor torque
Reference power 100 % = r2004 p2003 × p2000 × π
r2004 =
30
Reference frequency p2000
100 % =
60
Reference control factor 100 % = Maximum output voltage
without overload
Reference flux 100 % = Rated motor flux
Reference temperature 100% = 100 °C

Setting the Date / Time

In this menu, you set the date and time.

Setting the Language

In this menu, you can select the active language.
You have a choice between the two languages currently stored in the operator
panel.
If the language you require is not available, you can load it separately (see
Chapter 11).

Menu for Resetting System Settings

You can choose this menu option to reset the following settings to the factory
settings:
• Language
• Display (brightness, contrast)
• Operation screen
• Control settings
The settings do not become effective until the power supply is next switched on.

IMPORTANT
When you reset parameters, all settings that are different to the factory settings are
reset immediately. This may cause the cabinet unit to switch to a different,
unwanted operational status.

For this reason, you should always take great care when resetting parameters.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-9
Operation 11/03

6.2.2.4 AOP30 – Diagnosis Menu

Software / Database Version

You can use this menu to display the firmware and database versions.
The database version must be compatible with the drive software status (you can
check this in parameter r0018).

Battery Status
In this menu, you can display the battery voltage numerically (in Volts) or as a bar
display. The battery ensures that the data in the database and the current time are
retained.
When the battery voltage is represented as a percentage, a battery voltage of ≤ 2 V
is equal to 0%, and a voltage of ≥ 3 V to 100%.
The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V.
• If the battery voltage is ≤ 2.45 V, the message "Replace battery" is displayed in
the status bar.
• If the battery voltage is ≤ 2.30V, the system displays a popup window with the
following information "Warning: weak battery".
• If the battery voltage is ≤ 2 V, the system displays a popup window with the
following information: "Warning: battery is empty".
• If the time and/or database are not available after the system has been
switched off for a prolonged period due to the voltage being too low, the loss is
established by means of a CRC check when the system is switched on again.
This triggers a message instructing the user to replace the battery and then load
the database and/or set the time.
For instructions on replacing batteries, see Chapter 11 ("Maintenance and
Servicing").

Communication
In this menu, you can call up information on the communications status between
the AOP and the drive.

Keyboard
In this screen, you can check that the keys are functioning properly. Keys that you
press are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display. You can press the
keys in any order you wish. You cannot exit the screen (F5 – "back") until you have
pressed each key at least once.

SINAMICS G150
6-10 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.2.2.5 Drive Commissioning Menu

This option enables you to re-commission the drive from the main menu.

6.2.2.6 Device Commissioning Menu

In this menu, you can enter the device commissioning status directly. This is the
only way that you can reset parameters to the factory setting for example.
You can use this menu to create motor data sets in subsequent drive software
versions.

6.2.3 Operation via the Operator Panel (LOCAL Mode)

You activate the control keys by switching to LOCAL mode. If the green LED in the
LOCAL-REMOTE key does not light up, the control keys are not active.

6.2.3.1 Timeout Monitoring

Settings: MENU – Settings – Control Settings

Timeout monitoring (factory setting: 3000 ms)
The monitoring time continuously monitors communication between the operator
panel and drive.
If, when the drive is in LOCAL mode, no communication signal has been received
once the monitoring time has elapsed, the drive is stopped with OFF1 and fault
F1030 ("control priority monitoring: sign-of-life failure") is displayed.

6.2.3.2 LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Activate LOCAL mode: press the LOCAL key

LOCAL mode: LED lights up
REMOTE mode: LED does not light up: the ON, OFF, JOG, direction reversal,
faster, and slower keys are not active.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-11
Operation 11/03

Settings: MENU – Settings – Control Settings

Save LOCAL mode (factory setting: yes)
• Yes: "LOCAL" or "REMOTE" operating mode is saved when the supply voltage
is switched off, and restored when the supply voltage is switched back on.
• No: "LOCAL" or "REMOTE" operating mode is not saved. "REMOTE" is active
when the supply voltage is switched back on.
LOCAL/REMOTE also during operation (factory setting: no)
• Yes: You can switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is switched
on (motor is running).
• No: Before the system switches to LOCAL, a check is carried out to determine
whether the drive is in the operational status. If so, the system does not switch
to LOCAL and outputs the message "Local not possible". Before the system
switches to REMOTE, the drive is switched off and the setpoint is set to 0.

6.2.3.3 ON / OFF Key

ON key: always active in LOCAL when the operator input inhibit is deactivated.
OFF key: in the factory setting, acts as OFF1 = ramp-down on the deceleration
ramp (p1121), when n = 0: voltage disconnection (only if a main contactor is
installed).

Settings: MENU – Settings – Control Settings

Red OFF key acts as: (factory setting: OFF1)
• OFF1: Ramp-down on the deceleration ramp (p1121)
• OFF2: Immediate pulse block, motor coasts to a standstill
• OFF3: Ramp-down on the emergency stop ramp (p1135)

SINAMICS G150
6-12 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.2.3.4 Switching Between Clockwise and Counter-Clockwise Rotation

Settings: MENU – Settings – Control Settings

Switching between CW/CCW (factory setting: no)
• Yes: Switching between CW/CCW rotation by means of the CW/CCW key
possible in LOCAL mode
• No: The CW/CCW key has no effect in LOCAL mode
For safety reasons, the CW/CCW key is disabled in the factory setting (pumps and
fans must normally only be operated in one direction).
In the operation status in LOCAL mode, the current direction of rotation is indicated
by an arrow next to the operating mode.

6.2.3.5 Jog (reserved for future use)

6.2.3.6 Increase Setpoint / Decrease Setpoint

You can use the “increase” and “decrease” keys to set the setpoint with a
resolution of 1 % of the maximum speed.
(e.g. if the resolution is 15 min-1 at p1082 = 1500 min-1)
You can also enter the setpoint numerically. To do so, press F2 in the operation
screen. The system displays an inverted edit field for entering the required speed.
Enter the required value using the numeric keypad. Press F5 OK to confirm the
setpoint.
When you enter values numerically, you can enter any speed between the
minimum speed (p1080) and the maximum speed (p1082).
Setpoint entry in LOCAL mode is unipolar. You can change the direction of rotation
by pressing the +/- keys (see Section 6.2.3.4).

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-13
Operation 11/03

6.2.3.7 Motor potentiometer

Settings: MENU – Settings – Control Settings

Save motor potentiometer setpoint (factory setting: no)
• Yes: In LOCAL mode, the last setpoint (once you have released the INCREASE
or DECREASE key or confirmed a numeric entry) is saved.
The next time you switch the system on in LOCAL mode, the saved value is
selected. This is also the case if you switched to REMOTE in the meantime or
the power supply was switched off.
When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is
switched on (motor is running), the actual value that was last present is set as
the output value for the motor potentiometer setpoint and saved.
If the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is
switched off, the motor potentiometer setpoint that was last saved is used.
• No: When you switch the system on in LOCAL mode, setpoint 0 is always
selected. When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while
the drive is switched on (motor is running), the actual value that was last
present is set as the output value for the motor potentiometer setpoint.
Motor potentiometer ramp-up time (factory setting: 20 s)
Motor potentiometer ramp-down time (factory setting: 30 s)
• Recommendation: set as ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120 / p1121)

6.2.3.8 Operator Input Inhibit / Parameterization Inhibit

To prevent users from accidentally actuating the control keys and changing
parameters, you can activate an operator input / parameterization inhibit using a
key pushbutton. Two key icons appear in the top right of the display when these
inhibit functions are enabled.

Table 6-3 Display for operator input / parameterization inhibit

Inhibit type Online operation Offline operation

No inhibit

Operator Input Inhibit

Parameterization Inhibit

Operator input inhibit +

parameterization inhibit

SINAMICS G150
6-14 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

Settings
Operator input inhibit (factory setting: no)
• Yes: The parameters can still be viewed, but a parameter value cannot be
saved (message in the status bar: "Operator input inhibit – parameterization
disabled"). The OFF key (red) is enabled. The LOCAL, REMOTE, ON (green),
JOG, CW/CCW, INCREASE, and DECREASE keys are disabled.
Parameterization inhibit (factory setting: no)
• Yes: Parameters cannot be changed unless a password is entered. The
parameterization process is the same as with the operator input inhibit. If you try
and change parameters, the message "Parameterization inhibit – no change
rights" is displayed in the status bar. All the control keys can, however, still be
actuated.

NOTE
If you have forgotten your password, you can switch off the parameterization inhibit
as follows:
1. Switch off the power supply
2. Disconnect the RS232 data cable
3. When switching the power supply back on, press the key pushbutton and hold
down for 20 s.
4. When the key symbol in the top right of the display disappears, the access
protection function has been reset.

Access level (standard factory setting):

The different parameters required for this complex application are filtered so that
they can be displayed as clearly as possible. You select them according to the
access level.
An expert level, which must only be used by expert personnel, is required for
certain actions. You need a password to activate this level. To activate expert
mode, enter code number "47".
The "Expert" access level is not stored permanently, which means that it must be
reactivated every time the power is switched on.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-15
Operation 11/03

6.2.4 Faults and Alarms

Indicating Faults and Alarms

If a fault occurs, the drive displays the fault and/or alarm on the operator panel.
Faults are indicated by the red "FAULT" LED and a fault screen is automatically
displayed. You can use the F1 Help function to call up information about the cause
of the fault and how to remedy it. You can use F5 Ack. to acknowledge a stored
fault.
Any alarms are displayed by the yellow "ALARM" LED. The system also displays a
note in the status bar providing information on the cause.

What is a Fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional
(unwanted) status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an
external fault triggered, for example, from the winding temperature monitor for the
asynchronous motor. The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher-level
control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory default setting, the message
"converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have rectified the cause of
the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.
The list of faults and alarms in Chapter 10 indicates the type of response (OFF1,
OFF2, and so on) for each fault message.

What is an Alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive. It does not
result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged.
Alarms are "self acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the
cause of the alarm has been eliminated.

Fault and Alarm Displays

Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the error
occurred and the time it was rectified. The time stamp relates to the relative system
time in milliseconds (r0969).

SINAMICS G150
6-16 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

Current fault in: 33463512 Drv: Motor Overtemp.

F7011 Drv: Motor Overtemp. Fault value: 00000000 00000000H
Cause:
F1 Motor temperature has reached the
fault threshold parameterized in
(p0605).
Remedy:
Help Old Back Ack. Back

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Fig. 6-6 Fault screen

Alarm memory Status Antr: Motor Übertemp.

A7850 External warning 1 F1 AlarmVal: 00000000 00000000(hex)
A7910 Drv: Motor Overtemp. active Cause:
A7852 External warning 3 Motor temperature has exceeded the
alarm threshold parameterized in
F5 p0604.
The reaction set in p0610 is
Help Delete Back upd. Back

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Fig. 6-7 Alarm screen

6.2.5 Saving the Parameters Permanently

Description
If parameters have been changed on the operator panel (press OK in the
Parameter Editor to confirm), the new values are initially stored in a volatile
memory (RAM). An "S" flashes in the top right of the display until they are saved to
a permanent memory. This indicates that at least 1 parameter has been changed
and not yet stored permanently.
Two methods are available for permanently saving parameters that have been
changed:
• Call up the Help function from any screen and press F4 EEPROM
• When confirming a parameter setting with OK, press the OK key for > 1s. The
system displays a message asking you whether the setting is to be saved in the
EEPROM.
If you press "Yes", the system saves the setting in the EEPROM. If you press
"No", the setting is not saved permanently and the "S" starts flashing.
In both cases, all changes that have not yet been saved permanently are stored in
the EEPROM.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-17
Operation 11/03

6.2.6 Parameterization Errors

If an error occurs while parameters are being read or written, this is indicated in the
status bar on the operator panel (the eighth or lowest line in the operation screen,
or the seventh line in all other screens).
The system displays:
Parameter write error (d)pxxxx.yy:0xnn
and a plain-text explanation of the type of parameterization error.

SINAMICS G150
6-18 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.3 Control via the Terminal Block

6.3.1 General

The customer terminal block (-A60) is available as a control interface for the
customer. You can use this interface to connect the system to the higher-level
controller using analog and digital signals, or connect additional devices.
The customer terminal block is a type TM31 module.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-19
Operation 11/03

6.3.2 Analog Inputs

Description
The customer terminal block features two analog inputs for specifying setpoints via
current or voltage signals. In the factory setting, analog input 0 (terminal X521:1/2)
is used as the current input.

Prerequisite

Main setpoint is specified by analog input 0

p1070 = r4055[00]
<MENU> - <parameterization> - <all parameters> - Select
p1070 and set to r4055 - Select index [00]

Proposed Connection Assignment

-A10 (CU 320)

~
-A60 (TM31)
=
X540
1 +

1: Terminal
block X530
PROFIBUS/
=
terminal block 1 DI 4
~
user wiring
X521
S5.0
1 AI 0+
2 AI 0-
M
20 mA = n max 3
(p2000) 4
AI 1+ ~
AI 1-
5 P10
6 M
7 N10
8 M

X520
ON/OFF1 1 DI 0
2 DI 1
3 DI 2
Fault ack. 4 DI 3
5 M1
6 M

Fig. 6-8 Proposed connection assignment

SINAMICS G150
6-20 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

Signal Flow Diagram

V I S5.0
V I S5.1 Type Smoothing
p4056 p4053
Offset
X521:1
act. V/I p4063 act. value
r4052 Scaling r4055
S5.0 + A
AI 0
X521:2 - D

F3505
(for p4056 = 3 only)
Wire Break Analog Input

Fig. 6-9 Signal flow diagram: Analog input 0

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5
p4056 Analog input type
Factory setting: 2: 0 ... 20 mA
Setting parameter for the type of the analog inputs on the customer terminal block.
Values: 0: 0 ... 10 V
2: 0 ... 20 mA
3: 4 ... 20 mA with open-circuit monitoring
4: -10 ... +10 V
5: -20 ... +20 mA
Settings 0 and 4: switch S5.0 on the customer terminal block (-A60) must be set to "V".
Settings 2, 3, and 5: switch S5.0 on the customer terminal block (-A60) must be set to "I".
Setting 3 with open-circuit monitoring: fault F3505 is triggered if the input current is less than 2 mA.

r4052 Current input voltage/current Unit: V or mA

The current input voltage is displayed in V when the analog input is set as a voltage input (p4056 = 0 / 4)
and switch S5.0 is set to "V".
The current input current is displayed in mA when the analog input is set as a current input (p4056 = 2 / 3
/ 5) and switch S5.0 is set to "I".

Setting range: -20.000 ... 20.000 V or mA

p4063 Analog input offset
Factory setting: 0.000 V or mA
Setting parameter for the offset added to the input signal upstream of the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when the analog input is set as a voltage input (p4056 = 0 / 4) and switch S5.0 is set to "V".
The unit is mA when the analog input is set as a current input (p4056 = 2 / 3 / 5) and switch S5.0 is
set to "I".

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-21
Operation 11/03

Smoothing time constant analog Setting range: 0.0 ... 1000.0 ms

p4053
inputs Factory setting: 0.0 ms
st
Setting parameter for the time constant of the 1 order low-pass filter for the analog inputs.

r4055 Current per-unit input value Unit: %

Display the current input value of the analog input in %.

NOTE
In the factory setting and after basic commissioning, an input current of 20 mA is
equal to the main setpoint 100 % reference speed (p2000), which has been set to
the maximum speed (p1082).

Example: Changing Analog Input 0 from Current to Voltage Input –10 to +10 V

Current / voltage switchover

S5.0 = "V"
Set the current / voltage selector switch to "voltage" (V)

p4056 = 4 Set analog input 0 type to -10 ... +10 V

Fig. 6-10 Example: Setting analog input 0

F3505 – Fault: "Analog input cable breakage"

This fault is triggered when analog input type (p4056) is set to 3 (4 ... 20 mA with
open-circuit monitoring) and the input current of 2 mA has been undershot.
The fault value can be used to determine the analog input in question.

Example

TM: Analog I. Wire Break

FaultValue: 0000000003 00000003(hex)
Cause: Component ID
TM31.Wire break analog input 3: Modul -A60
Remedy: 4: Modul -A61 (option)
TM31.Check Cable. Anal.Input
0: Analog input 0: -X521:1/2
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1: Analog input 1: -X521:3/4
Back

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Fig. 6-11 Fault screen

SINAMICS G150
6-22 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.3.3 Motor Potentiometer

Description
The digital motor potentiometer enables you to set speeds remotely using
switching signals (+/- keys). This is activated via terminals X520:2 and X520:3.
Provided that a logical 1 is present at terminal -X520:2 (increase setpoint), the
internal counter adopts this setpoint. You can set the integration time (time taken
for the setpoint to increase) via the operator panel using parameter p1047. The
setpoint can be decreased in the same way via terminal -X520:3 (decrease
setpoint). You can set the deceleration ramp via the operator panel using
parameter p1048.

Prerequisite

Main setpoint is specified by motor potentiometer

p1070 = r1050
<MENU> - <parameterization> - <all parameters> - Select
p1070 and set to r1050

Proposed Connection Assignment

-A10 (CU 320)

~
~
-A60 (TM31)
=
X540
1 +

1: Terminal X530
PROFIBUS/ block
terminal block
1 DI 4 = ~
~
X520
1 DI 0
ON/OFF1
2 DI 1
Motor potentiometer UP
3 DI 2 M
Motor potentiometer DOWN
Fault ack.
4 DI 3 ~
5 M1
6 M

Fig. 6-12 Circuit proposal

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-23
Operation 11/03

Signal Flow Diagram

increase
-X520:2
Ramp-up time Ramp-down time
decrease p1047 p1048
-X520:3

y
0 0 p1082
MOP.SetpnRG
Motorpoti max r1050
0 1
p1037

Motorpoti min x
p1038 1 0 Motor potentiometer
(implemented via internal
ramp generator)
1 1 -p1082

Fig. 6-13 Signal flow diagram: Motor potentiometer

Setting Parameters

Motor potentiometer Setting range: -210000.000 … +210000.000 1/min

p1037
maximum speed Factory setting: p1082 (maximum speed)
Maximum speed entry for the motor potentiometer.

Motor potentiometer Setting range: -210000.000 … +210000.000 1/min

p1038
minimum speed Factory setting: -p1082 (maximum speed)
Minimum speed entry for the motor potentiometer.

Motor potentiometer ramp-up Setting range: 0.000 ... 1000.000 s

p1047
time Factory setting: 10.000 s
Ramp-up time entry for the motor potentiometer.

Motor potentiometer ramp- Setting range: 0.000 ... 1000.000 s

p1048
down time Factory setting: 10.000 s
Ramp-down time entry for the motor potentiometer.

Motor potentiometer speed

r1050 setpoint downstream of ramp Unit: 1/min
generator
Display the setpoint downstream of the motor potentiometer.

SINAMICS G150
6-24 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.3.4 Fixed Speed Setpoints

Description
Three settable fixed speed setpoints are available. These can be selected via
terminals X530:3 and X530:4.

Prerequisite

Main setpoint is specified by fixed speed setpoint

p1070 = r1024
<MENU> - <parameterization> - <all parameters> - Select
p1070 and set to r1024

Proposed Connection Assignment

-A10 (CU 320)

~
~
-A60 (TM31) =
X540
1 +

1: Terminal X530
PROFIBUS/ block
~
DI 4
terminal block
1
2 DI 5
= ~
Fixed setpoint selection 3 DI 6
bit 0 4 DI 7
Fixed setpoint selection 5 M2
bit 0
6 M
M
~
X520
1 DI 0
ON/OFF1
2 DI 1
3 DI 2
4 DI 3
Fault ack.
5 M1
6 M

Fig. 6-14 Proposed connection assignment

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-25
Operation 11/03

Signal Flow Diagram

-X530:3

-X530:4

0.000 0 0

Fixed speed setpoint

Fixed speed setpoint 01 active
0 1
p1001 r1024

Fixed speed setpoint 02

p1002 1 0

Fixed speed setpoint 03

1 1
p1003

Fig. 6-15 Signal flow diagram: Fixed speed setpoints

Setting Parameters

Setting range: -210000.000 ... +210000.000 1/min

p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 01
Factory setting: 300,000 1/min
Entry for the first fixed speed setpoint.

Setting range: -210000.000 … +210000.000 1/min

p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 02
Factory setting: 600.000 1/min
Entry for the second fixed speed setpoint.

Setting range: -210000.000 ... +210000.000 1/min

p1003 Fixed speed setpoint 03
Factory setting: 1500.000 1/min
Entry for the third fixed speed setpoint.

r1024 Fixed speed setpoint active Unit: 1/min

Display the active fixed speed setpoint.

SINAMICS G150
6-26 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.3.5 Further Settings for Analog Inputs

Description
In addition to the settings described in Chapter 6.3.2, a function for scaling input
signals is available.

Signal Flow Diagram

V I S5.0 Char. x1 Char. x2

V I S5.1 p4057 p4059
Type Smoothing
p4056 p4053
Offset
X521:1
act. V/I p4063 y [%] act. value
Char. y2
r4052 y2 r4055
A p4060
S5.0 +
x y
AI 0 x1 x2 x
X521:2 - D Char. y1
y1
(for p4056 = 3 only) p4058

F3505 Scaling
Wire Break Analog Input

Fig. 6-16 Signal flow diagram: Analog input 0

Setting Parameters for Scaling

Value x1 for the analog input Setting range: -20.000 ... +20.000 V or mA
p4057[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 0.000 mA
Setting for the x coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when analog input 0 is set as a voltage input (p4056 = 0 / 4) and switch S5.0 is set to "V".
The unit is mA when analog input 0 is set as a current input (p4056 = 2 / 3 / 5) and switch S5.0 is
set to "I".

Value y1 for the analog input Setting range: -1000.00 ... +1000.00 %
p4058[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 0.00 %
Setting for the y coordinate in % of the first point on the scaling characteristic.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-27
Operation 11/03

Value x2 for the analog input Setting range: -20.000 ... +20.000 V or mA
p4059[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 20.000 mA
Setting for the x coordinate in V or mA of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when analog input 0 is set as a voltage input (p4056 = 0 / 4) and switch S5.0 is set to "V".
The unit is mA when analog input 0 is set as a current input (p4056 = 2 / 3 / 5) and switch S5.0 is
set to "I".

Value y2 for the analog input Setting range: -1000.00 ... +1000.00 %
p4060[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 100.00 %
Setting for the y coordinate in % of the second point on the scaling characteristic.

SINAMICS G150
6-28 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.4 Control via PROFIBUS

6.4.1 PROFIBUS Connection

PROFIBUS Connection Position, Address Switch, and Diagnostic LED

The PROFIBUS connection, address switch, and diagnostics LED are located on
the control unit.

LEDs
X126
RDY
PROFIBUS- PROFIBUS
DP1
Connection Diagnostic-LED
OPT
MOD

PROFIBUS
Address Switch

Fig. 6-17 View of the control unit with PROFIBUS interface

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-29
Operation 11/03

PROFIBUS Connection
The PROFIBUS is connected by means of a 9-pin Sub-D socket (X126). The
connections are electrically isolated.

Table 6-4 X126 - PROFIBUS connection

Pin Signal name Meaning Range

1 SHIELD Ground connection
2 M24_SERV Power supply for teleservice, ground 0V
1 3 RxD/TxD-P Receive / transmit data P (B/B') RS485
4 CNTR-P Control signal TTL
5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential (C/C')
6 VP Supply voltage plus 5 V ± 10 %
9
7 P24_SERV Power supply for teleservice P, + (24 V) 24 V (20.4 V -28.8 V)
8 RxD/TxD-N Receive / transmit data N (A/A') RS485
9 - Not used

Connectors
The cables must be connected via PROFIBUS connectors because they contain
terminating resistors.

PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector

without programming with programming device /
device / PC connection PC connection
6ES7972-0BA41-0XA0 6ES7972-0BB41-0XA0

Fig. 6-18 PROFIBUS connectors

Bus Terminating Resistor

The bus terminating resistor must be switched on or off depending on its position in
the bus, otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly.
Principle: the terminating resistors must only be switched on at both ends of the
bus line; the resistors must be switched off at all other connectors.
The cable shield must be connected at both ends with the greatest possible
surface area.

SINAMICS G150
6-30 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

First bus node Last bus node

on on on
off off off

Bus terminator Bus terminator

From previous
To next bus node
bus node

Fig. 6-19 Position of the bus terminating resistors

Cable Routing

Entry of PROFIBUS cable

from above into electronics
board

Route bus cable along

available cable line and
fasten it to this line with cable
ties

To pass the cable through,

the bus connector has to be
dismantled

Shield connection

Fig. 6-20 Cable routing

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-31
Operation 11/03

6.4.2 Control via PROFIBUS

6.4.2.1 General

"DP1 (PROFIBUS)" Diagnostics LED

The PROFIBUS diagnostics LED is located on the front of the control unit (see
Section 6.4) Its statuses are described in the following table.

Table 6-5 Description of the LEDs

Color State Description

------ Off No voltage applied to control unit
Green Continuously lit PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is
taking place
Green Flashing 0.5 Hz PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is
not taking place
Red Continuously lit At least one PROFIBUS fault is present. PROFIBUS is not ready for
operation (e.g. after power-on)

6.4.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS Address

Two methods are available for setting the PROFIBUS address:
• The address switches (DIP switches) on the front of the control unit behind the
cover plate (see Section 6.4.1).
If you use the address switch, parameter p0918 is read only and displays the
address that is set.
If the switch is reset, the new setting does not become effective until the control
unit is reset.
• Entering parameter p0918 on the operator panel.
You can only do this if the address has been set to 0 or 127 using the address
switch, that is, all switches from S1 to S7 are set to ON or OFF.
In this case, changes become effective immediately.

Table 6-6 PROFIBUS address switches

Switch Significance Technical data

0
S1 2 =1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Significance
S2 1
2 =2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
ON
S3 22 = 4
OFF
S4 23 = 8
S1 ... S7
S5 24 = 16
ON
S6 25 = 32 Example
OFF
S7 26 = 64 1 + 4 + 32 = 37

SINAMICS G150
6-32 Operating Manual
11/03 Operation

6.4.3 Process Data

6.4.3.1 Control Word 1

Table 6-7 Description of control word 1

Bit Meaning Explanation Operating

condition
0 : Deceleration on the deceleration ramp
0 = OFF1 (OFF1) (p1121), then pulse block, main contactor (if
0 fitted) is opened. 1

1 = ON
0 : Pulse block, main contactor (if fitted) is
0 = Coast to stop (OFF2)
1 opened 1
1 = Do not coast to stop
0: Deceleration on the rapid-stop ramp
0 = Emergency stop (OFF3) (p1115), then pulse block, main contactor (if
2 fitted) is opened. 1

1 = No emergency stop
0 = Disable operation
3 1
1 = Enable operation
0: The ramp generator output is set to
0 = Set ramp generator to zero
4 setpoint "0". 1
1 = Enable ramp generator

0: The current setpoint is frozen at the ramp

0 = Freeze ramp generator
5 generator output. 1
1 = Restart ramp generator

The setpoint is enabled at the ramp generator

6 1 = Enable speed setpoint 1
input.
A positive signal transition acknowledges all
7 0 -> 1 = Acknowledge error –
the current faults
8 reserved –
9 reserved –
1: Control words and setpoints are analyzed
10 1 = Control via PLC 0: Control words and setpoints are not 1
analyzed
11 1 = Direction reversal –
12 reserved –
1 = Increase motor
13 –
potentiometer
1 = Decrease motor
14 –
potentiometer
15 reserved –

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 6-33
Operation 11/03

6.4.3.2 Status Word 1

Table 6-8 Description of status word 1

Bit Meaning
0 1 = Ready to start
1 1 = Ready to operate
2 1 = Operation enabled
3 1 = Fault present
4 0 = Coast to stop active (OFF2)
5 0 = Emergency stop active (OFF3)
6 1 = Power-on disable
7 1 = Alarm present
8 1 = Speed setpoint/actual deviation within tolerance band
9 1 is always present
10 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded
11 1 = I, M, or P limit reached
12 reserved
13 0 = Alarm motor overtemperature
14 1 = Motor rotating forwards (nact >= 0)
0 = Motor rotating backwards (nact < 0)
15 1 = Alarm thermal overload in power section

6.4.3.3 Selecting the Message Frame Type

Description
By selecting predefined message frame types, you can define the volume of send
and receive data transmitted.

Table 6-9 Message frame type options

Type PZD 1 PZD 2 PZD 3 PZD 4 PZD 5 PZD 6

CW 1 N_SETP
1
SW 1 N_ACT
CW 1 N_SETP
20 I_ACT M_ACT P_ACT FAULT
SW 1 N_ACT

SINAMICS G150
6-34 Operating Manual
Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop
7

Control 7
7.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the setpoint channel and closed-loop control
functions.
• Setpoint channel
– Direction reversal
– Suppression speed
– Minimum speed
– Speed limitation
– Ramp generator
• Closed-loop control (in preparation)

6 7 5
Setpoint channel Closed-loop control

Cabinet operator panel

M
~

PROFIBUS 8

Input terminals Output terminals

-A60 -A60

10 9
Diagnosis Faults / alarms Monitoring Functions Protective functions

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 7-1
Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control 11/03

7.2 Setpoint Channel

7.2.1 Direction Reversal

Description
If an incorrect phase sequence was connected when the cables were installed, and
the phase sequence cannot be corrected by swapping the motor cables, it can be
corrected by means of a negative command value or by parameterizing the cabinet
unit, thereby enabling the direction to be reversed. This is mainly used for
operating the drive in both directions of rotation.

Prerequisites
Direction reversal is triggered:
• via PROFIBUS by means of control word 1, bit 11
• via the cabinet operator panel (LOCAL mode) with the "direction reversal" key.

SINAMICS G150
7-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control

7.2.2 Minimum Speed

Description
Specifying a minimum speed allows you to disable a specific range about speed 0
1/min for stationary operation.

Signal Flow Diagram

Minimum speed
p1080

y
Setp_after_Lim nSet_afterSkip
r1114 r1112
x y
x
-1

Suppress. speed Minimum speed

Fig. 7-1 Signal flow diagram: Minimum speed

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0.000 ... 19500.000 1/min

p1080 Minimum speed
Factory setting: 0.000 1/min
Setting parameter for the minimum speed. This speed is not undershot during operation.

r1112 Speed setpoint after minimum limit Unit: 1/min

Display of speed setpoint after the minimum limit.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 7-3
Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control 11/03

7.2.3 Speed Limitation

Description
Speed limitation aims to limit the maximum permissible speed of the entire drive
train to protect the drive and load machine / process against damage caused by
excessive speeds.

Signal Flow Diagram

Speed limit positive

p1083
nSet_afterSkip nSetbefore_RG
r1112 r1119

Speed limit negative

p1086

Fig. 7-2 Signal flow diagram: Speed limitation

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0.000 ... 210000.000 1/min

p1082 Speed limit
Factory setting: 1500.000 1/min
Setting parameter for the maximum speed. This parameter is the reference speed for all ramp-up and
ramp-down times (motor potentiometer, ramp generator).

Speed limit positive direction of Setting range: 0.000 ... 210000.000 1/min
p1083
rotation Factory setting: 210000.000 1/min
Setting parameter for the speed limit in a positive direction of rotation.

Speed limit negative direction of Setting range: -210000.000 ... 0.000 1/min
p1086
rotation Factory setting: -210000.000 1/min
Setting parameter for the speed limit in a negative direction of rotation. If required, this parameter can be
used to disable the negative direction of rotation.

SINAMICS G150
7-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control

7.2.4 Ramp Generator

Description
The ramp generator limits the rate at which the setpoint changes when the drive is
accelerating or decelerating. This prevents excessive setpoint step changes from
damaging the drive train. You can also set additional rounding times in the lower
and upper speed ranges to improve control quality and prevent load surges,
thereby protecting mechanical components, such as shafts and couplings.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times relate to the maximum speed (p1082). The
rounding times that can be set can prevent the actual speed value from being
overshot when the setpoint is approached, thereby improving control quality.
Caution: if rounding times are too long, this can cause the setpoint to be overshot if
the setpoint is reduced abruptly during ramp-up. Rounding is also effective in the
zero crossover; in other words, when the direction is reversed, the ramp generator
output is reduced to zero via start rounding, the ramp-down time, and end rounding
before the new, inverted setpoint is approached via start rounding, the ramp-up
time, and end rounding. Rounding has no effect in the event of an emergency stop
(OFF3). The actual ramp-up/ramp-down times increase with active rounding.

Signal Flow Diagram

RG.T_Ramp_Up RG.T_InitRnd RG.T_FInRnd RG.T_Ramp_Down

0.00...999999.00 s 0.00...30.00 s 0.00...30.00 s 0.00...999999.00 s
p1120 (10.00) p1130 (0.00) p1131 (0.00) p1121 (10.00)

nSetbefore_RG nSetp_after_RG
r1119 r1150

p1130 p1131 p1130 p1131 t

Fig. 7-3 Signal flow diagram: Ramp generator

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 7-5
Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control 11/03

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0.00 ... 999999.00 s

p1120 Ramp generator ramp-up time
Factory setting: 10.00 s
During this interval, the setpoint increases from zero to the speed limit (p1082).

Setting range: 0.00 ... 999999.00 s

p1121 Ramp generator ramp-down time
Factory setting: 10.00 s
During this interval, the setpoint decreases from the speed limit (p1082) to zero.

Setting range: 0.00 ... 30.00 s

p1130 Ramp generator start rounding time
Factory setting: 0.00 s
Setting for the start rounding time. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.

Setting range: 0.00 ... 30.00 s

p1131 Ramp generator end rounding time
Factory setting: 0.00 s
Setting for the end rounding time. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.

NOTE
The effective ramp-up time increases when you enter a start and end rounding
time.

Effective ramp-up time = p1120 + (0.5 x p1130) + (0.5 x p1131)

SINAMICS G150
7-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control

7.2.5 Further Settings

7.2.5.1 Suppression Speed and Minimum Speed

Description
Variable-speed drives can generate critical whirling speeds within the control range
of the entire drive train. This prevents steady-state operation in their proximity; in
other words, although the drive can pass through this range, it must not stop
because resonant oscillations may be excited. The skip frequency bands allow this
range to be blocked for steady-state operation. Because the points at which critical
whirling speeds occur in a drive train can vary depending on age or thermal factors,
a larger control range must be blocked. To ensure that the speed does not
constantly increase and decrease in the skip frequency band range (speeds), the
bands are assigned a hysteresis.

Signal Flow Diagram

Suppress. speed 1 Suppress. speed 4

p1091 p1094
Suppress. speed 2 Suppress. speed 3
p1092 p1093

|y|

Minimum speed
p1080

y
Setp_after_Lim w nSet_afterSkip
r1114 r1112
x y x y
x
w -1

w Minimum speed

w |x|

n_Suppr.Bandwidth
p1101

Fig. 7-4 Signal flow diagram: Suppression speeds and minimum speeds

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 7-7
Setpoint Channel and Closed-Loop Control 11/03

Setting Parameters for Suppression Speeds

Setting range: 0.000 ... 210000.000 1/min
p1091 Suppression speed 1
Factory setting: 0.000 1/min
Setting parameter for suppression speed 1.

Setting range: 0.000 ... 210000.000 1/min

p1092 Suppression speed 2
Factory setting: 0.000 1/min
Setting parameter for suppression speed 2.

Setting range: 0.000 ... 210000.000 1/min

p1093 Suppression speed 3
Factory setting: 0.000 1/min
Setting parameter for suppression speed 3.

Setting range: 0.000 ... 210000.000 1/min

p1094 Suppression speed 4
Factory setting: 0.000 1/min
Setting parameter for suppression speed 4.

Setting range: 0.000 ... +210000.000 1/min

p1101 Suppression speed bandwidth
Factory setting: 0.000 1/min
Setting for the bandwidth for suppression speeds 1 to 4.

7.3 Closed-Loop Control

(in preparation)

SINAMICS G150
7-8 Operating Manual
Output Terminals
8

8
8.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on:
• Analog outputs
• Digital outputs

6 7 5
Setpoint channel Closed-loop control

Cabinet operator panel

M
~

PROFIBUS 8

Input terminals Output terminals

-A60 -A60

10 9
Diagnosis Faults / alarms Monitoring Functions Protective functions

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 8-1
Output Terminals 11/03

8.2 Analog Outputs

Description
The customer terminal block features two analog outputs for outputting setpoints
via current or voltage signals.

Signal Flow Diagram

AO_Signal
p4071

Smoothing AO type
Actual speed p4076
r0063 p4073 Voltage
Output current act. V/I output
Scaling
r0068 r4074 AO 0V+ X522.1
DC-link voltage
D
r0070 +-10V
A AO 0A+ X522.3
...
Smoothing +-20mA
Output power
r0082 Current output

AO 0 Bez
X522.2

Fig. 8-1 Signal flow diagram: Analog output 0

Setting Parameters for Analog Output 0 (AO0)

Setting range: see list

p4071[0] Signal source for the analog output
Factory setting: r1445 (N_ACT)
Setting parameter for the signal to be output for analog output 0 on the customer terminal block.

Setting range: 0 ... 1000 ms

p4073[0] Smoothing time for analog output
Factory setting: 0 ms
st
Setting parameter for the time constant of the 1 order low-pass filter for analog output 0.

r4074[0] Current output voltage/current Unit: V or mA

The current output voltage is displayed in V when analog output 0 is set as a voltage output (p4076 = 1 /
4) and terminals X522: 1 and 2 are used.
The current output current is displayed in mA when analog output 0 is set as a current output (p4076 = 0
/ 2 /3) and terminals X522: 3 and 2 are used.

SINAMICS G150
8-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Output Terminals

Setting range: 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
p4076[0] Analog output type
Factory setting: 0: 0 ... 20 mA
Setting parameter for the type of analog output 0 on the customer terminal block.
Values: 0: 0 ... 20 mA
1: 0 ... 10 V
2: 4 ... 20 mA
3: -20 ... +20 mA
4: -10 ... +10 V
Settings 0, 2, and 3: terminals X522: 3 and 2 must be used.
Settings 1 and 4: terminals X522: 1 and 2 must be used.

Setting Parameters for Analog Output 1 (AO1)

Setting range: see list

p4071[1] Signal source for the analog output
Factory setting: r0068 (I_ACT)
Setting parameter for the signal to be output for analog output 1 on the customer terminal block.

Setting range: 0 ... 1000 ms

p4073[1] Smoothing time for analog output
Factory setting: 0 ms
st
Setting parameter for the time constant of the 1 order low-pass filter for analog output 1.

r4074[1] Current output voltage/current Unit: V or mA

The current output voltage is displayed in V when analog output 1 is set as a voltage output (p4076 = 1 /
4) and terminals X522: 4 and 5 are used.
The current output current is displayed in mA when analog output 1 is set as a current output (p4076 = 0
/ 2 /3) and terminals X522: 6 and 5 are used.

Setting range: 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
p4076[1] Analog output type
Factory setting: 0: 0 ... 20 mA
Setting parameter for the type of analog output 1 on the customer terminal block.
Values: 0: 0 ... 20 mA
1: 0 ... 10 V
2: 4 ... 20 mA
3: -20 ... +20 mA
4: -10 ... +10 V
Settings 0, 2, and 3: terminals X522: 6 and 5 must be used.
Settings 1 and 4: terminals X522: 4 and 5 must be used.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 8-3
Output Terminals 11/03

List of Signals for the Analog Outputs

Signal Parameter Unit Scaling
(100 % = ...) (see
Table 8-1)
Speed setpoint upstream of setpoint filter r0060 1/min p2000
Motor speed unsmoothed r0061 1/min p2000
Actual speed after smoothing r0063 1/min p2000
Output frequency r0066 Hz Reference frequency
Output current r0068 Aeff p2002
DC link voltage r0070 V p2001
Torque setpoint r0079 Nm p2003
Output power r0082 kW r2004
For diagnostic purposes
Control deviation r0064 1/min p2000
Slip frequency r0065 Hz Reference frequency
Actual phase current r0069 A p2002
Control factor r0074 % Reference control factor
Field-producing current setpoint r0075 A p2002
Field-producing actual current r0076 A p2002
Torque-producing current setpoint r0077 A p2002
Torque-producing actual current r0078 A p2002
Flux setpoint r0083 % Reference flux
Actual flux r0084 % Reference flux
DC link voltage setpoint r0088 V p2001
Phase voltage r0089 V p2001
For further diagnostic purposes
Speed controller output r1480 Nm p2003
I component of speed controller r1482 Nm p2003

SINAMICS G150
8-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Output Terminals

Scaling

Table 8-1 Scaling

Variable Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning

Reference speed 100 % = p2000 p2000 = Maximum speed (p1082)
Reference voltage 100 % = p2001 p2001 = 1000 V
Reference current 100 % = p2002 p2002 = Current limit (p0640)
Reference torque 100 % = p2003 p2003 = 2 x rated motor torque
Reference power 100 % = r2004 p2003 × p2000 × π
r2004 =
30
Reference frequency p2000
100 % =
60
Reference control 100 % = Maximum output voltage
factor without overload
Reference flux 100 % = Rated motor flux
Reference 100% = 100 °C
temperature

Example: Changing Analog Output 0 from Current to Voltage Output –10 to +10 V

X522: 1,2 Voltage output present at terminal 1, ground at terminal 2

p4076 = 4 Set analog input 0 type to -10 V ... +10 V

Fig: 8-2 Example: Setting analog output 0

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 8-5
Output Terminals 11/03

8.3 Digital Outputs

Description
Four bi-directional digital outputs (terminal X541) and two relay outputs (terminal
X542) are available. These outputs are, for the most part, freely parameterizable.

Signal Flow Diagram

Invert

p4048.0 X542
0 1
1 DO 0 2
p4030 p4048.1 3
1 = Ready to start
4
r0899.0 p4031 1
1 DO 1 5
1 = Ready to operate
6
r0899.1 p4038
1 = Operation enabled
r0899.2 p4039 X541
+ 1
... p4040 p4048.8...11 DI/DO 8 2
1 = Ramp-up/ DI/DO 9 3
ramp-down completed p4041 4
1 DI/DO 10
r2199.5 5
DI/DO 11
M 6

Fig. 8-3 Signal flow diagram: Digital outputs

Factory Setting

Digital output Terminal Factory Setting

DO0 X542: 2,3 "Enable pulses"
DO1 X542: 5,6 "No fault"
DI/DO8 X541: 2 "Ready to start"
DI/DO9 X541: 3 "LOCAL mode active"
DI/DO10 X541: 4 "Enable pulses"
DI/DO11 X541: 5

SINAMICS G150
8-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Output Terminals

Selection of possible connections for the digital outputs

Signal Bit in status Parameter
word 1
1 = Ready to start 0 r0889.0
1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked) 1 r0889.1
1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_setp) 2 r0889.2
1 = Fault present 3 r2139.3
0 = Coast to stop active (OFF2) 4 r0889.4
0 = Emergency stop active (OFF3) 5 r0889.5
1 = Power-on disable 6 r0889.6
1 = Alarm present 7 r2139.7
1 = Speed setpoint/actual deviation within tolerance band (p2163, p2166) 8 r2197.7
1 = Control required to PLC 9 r0899.9
1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141, p2142) 10 r2199.1
1 = I, M, or P limit reached (p0640, p1520, p1521) 11 r1407.7
reserved 12
0 = Alarm motor overtemperature (A7910) 13 r2129.14
reserved 14
0 = Alarm thermal overload in power section (A5000) 15 r2129.15

1 = Pulses enabled (inverter is clocking, drive is carrying current) r0899.11

1 = n_act ≤ p2155 r2197.1
1 = n_act > p2155 r2197.2
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed r2199.5
1 = n_act < p2161 (preferably as n_min or n=0 message) r2199.0
1 = Torque setpoint < p2174 r2198.10
1 = LOCAL mode active (control via operator panel) r0807.0
0 = Motor blocked r2198.6
Active command data set (CDS): r0836.0
0 = CDS 0 (PROFIBUS), 1 = CDS 1 (terminal block)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 8-7
Output Terminals 11/03

8.4 Further Settings for Analog Outputs

Description
The customer terminal block (–A60) features two analog outputs for outputting
setpoints via current or voltage signals.
In addition to the settings described in Chapter 8.2, a function for scaling output
signals is available.

Signal Flow Diagram

AO Signal
p4071
Char. x1 Char. x2
p4077 p4079
Smoothing act. V/I AO_type
Actual speed p4076 Output
r0063 p4073 r4074
y [%] AO 0V+ voltage
Output current Char. y2
r0068 p4080 y2 X522.1
DC-link voltage x y
D
r0070 x1 x2 x +-10V
A X522.3
Char. y1
... y1 AO 0A+
Smoothing p4078
+-20mA
Output power
r0082 Scaling
Current output
AO 0 Bez

X522.2

Fig. 8-4 Signal flow diagram: Analog output 0

Additional Setting Parameters for Analog Output 0 (AO0)

Value x1 for the analog output Setting range: -1000.00 ... +1000.00 %
p4077[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 0.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the first point on the scaling characteristic.

Value y1 for the analog output Setting range: -20.000 ... +20.000 V or mA
p4078[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 0.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when analog output 0 is set as a voltage output (p4076[0] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 1
and 2 are used.
The unit is mA when analog output 0 is set as a current output (p4076[0] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522:
3 and 2 are used.

SINAMICS G150
8-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Output Terminals

Value x2 for the analog output Setting range: -1000.00 ... +1000.00 %
p4079[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 100.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the second point on the scaling characteristic.

Value y2 for the analog output Setting range: -20.000 ... +20.000 V or mA
p4080[0]
characteristic Factory setting: 20.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when analog output 0 is set as a voltage output (p4076[0] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 1
and 2 are used.
The unit is mA when analog output 0 is set as a current output (p4076[0] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522:
3 and 2 are used.

Additional Setting Parameters for Analog Output 1 (AO1)

Value x1 for the analog output Setting range: -1000.00 ... +1000.00 %
p4077[1]
characteristic Factory setting: 0.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the first point on the scaling characteristic.

Value y1 for the analog output Setting range: -20.000 ... +20.000 V or mA
p4078[1]
characteristic Factory setting: 0.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the first point on the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when analog output 1 is set as a voltage output (p4076[1] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 4
and 5 are used.
The unit is mA when analog output 1 is set as a current output (p4076[1] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522:
6 and 5 are used.

Value x2 for the analog output Setting range: -1000.00 ... +1000.00 %
p4079[1]
characteristic Factory setting: 100.00 %
Setting for the x coordinate in % of the second point on the scaling characteristic.

Value y2 for the analog output Setting range: -20.000 ... +20.000 V or mA
p4080[1]
characteristic Factory setting: 20.000 mA
Setting for the y coordinate in V or mA of the second point on the scaling characteristic.
The unit is V when analog output 1 is set as a voltage output (p4076[1] = 1 / 4) and terminals X522: 4
and 5 are used.
The unit is mA when analog output 1 is set as a current output (p4076[1] = 0 / 2 / 3) and terminals X522:
6 and 5 are used.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 8-9
Output Terminals 11/03

Example: Changing Analog Output 0 from Current to Voltage Output –10 - +10 V
and Setting the Characteristic

X522: 1,2 Voltage output present at terminal 1, ground at terminal 2

p4076[0] = 4 Set TM31.AO_type [analog output 0] to -10 - +10 V

p4077[0] = 0.00 Set TM31.AO_charac. x1 to 0.00%

p4078[0] = 0.000 Set TM31.AO_charac. y1 to 0.000 V

p4079[0] = 100.00 Set TM31.AO_charac. x2 to 100.00%

p4080[0] = 10.000 Set TM31.AO_charac. y2 to 10.000 V

Fig: 8-5 Example: Setting analog output 0 and the characteristic

SINAMICS G150
8-10 Operating Manual
Monitoring, Functions, and Protective
9

Functions 9
9.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on:
• Monitoring
• Functions
– Vdc-max closed-loop control
– Automatic restart
– Flying restart
• Protective functions

6 7 5
Setpoint channel Closed-loop control

Cabinet operator panel

M
~

PROFIBUS 8

Input terminals Output terminals

-A60 -A60

10 9
Diagnosis Faults / alarms Monitoring Functions Protective functions

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 9-1
Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions 11/03

9.2 Monitoring

(in preparation)

SINAMICS G150
9-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions

9.3 Functions

9.3.1 Vdc-max Controller

Description
The Vdc-max controller enables (restricted) braking operation of a drive with a
diode supply to the DC link. During braking operation, the machine supplies power
back to the DC link. Due to the configuration, however, a diode supply cannot
supply this power back to the line. The Vdc controller controls the supply of power
back from the machine to compensate for losses from the drive system and
prevent the DC link voltage from exceeding the maximum value. This prevents
potential shutdowns on faults caused by braking ramps that are too short, and the
drive coasts to a standstill in a controlled manner. The ramp-down times may
increase as a result.

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0 ... 3

p1240 Vdc controller configuration
Factory setting: 1
Setting for the controller configuration for the voltage DC link (Vdc controller)
Values: 0: Disable Vdc controller
1: Enable Vdc-max controller
The Vdc-max controller increases the ramp-down times automatically to keep the DC link voltage within
the permissible limits.

r1242 Vdc-max controller switch-on level Unit: V

Display the switch-on level of the Vdc-max controller.

Setting range: 10 ... 200 %

p1243 Vdc-max controller dynamic factor
Factory setting: 100 %
Setting for the dynamic factor of the Vdc-max controller.
100 % means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and derivative time) are used in
accordance with their basic settings based on theoretical controller optimization.
The dynamic factor can be used if subsequent optimization is required, whereby p1250, p1251, and
p1252 are evaluated with dynamic factor p1243.

Setting range: 0.00 ... 10.00

p1250 Vdc controller proportional gain
Factory setting: 1.00
Setting for the proportional gain of the Vdc-max controller.
The effective proportional gain can be determined using p1243.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 9-3
Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions 11/03

Setting range: 1 ... 1000 ms

p1251 Vdc controller integral time
Factory setting: 40 ms
Setting for the integral time of the Vdc-max controller.
The effective integral time can be determined using p1243.

Setting range: 0 ... 1000 ms

p1252 Vdc controller derivative-action time
Factory setting: 1 ms
Setting for the derivative-action time of the Vdc-max controller.
The active derivative-action time can be determined using p1243.

Vdc-max controller automatic detection of EIN Setting range: 0 / 1

p1254
level Factory setting: 0
Activates / deactivates automatic detection of the switch-on level for the Vdc-max controller.
Values: 0: Automatic detection disabled
1: Automatic detection enabled

Settings
Parameter p1240 functions as enable: 0: controller disabled, 1: controller enabled.
You use p1242 to define the starting point of the Vdc-max controller. This is the
maximum value of the DC link voltage that cannot be exceeded. If the DC link
voltage is below the starting point, the controller remains inactive. The controller
gain can be changed by means of p1250. The set ramp-down remains inactive
while the Vdc-max controller is active. The ramp-down time increases the more
excess kinetic energy is stored in the drive train.

SINAMICS G150
9-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions

9.3.2 Automatic Restart

Description
The automatic restart function automatically restarts the cabinet unit after an
undervoltage or a power failure. The alarms present are acknowledged and the
drive is restarted automatically. The drive can be restarted using the standard
procedure starting from standstill or using a flying restart. For drives with small
inertia loads and load torques where the drive can be brought to a standstill within
seconds (such as pump drives with water gauges), the start from standstill is
recommended. For drives with large inertia loads (such as fan drives), the flying
restart function can also be activated. This enables you to switch to the motor that
is still rotating.

WARNING
If p1210 is set to 2 or higher, the motor can be restarted automatically without the
need to issue the ON command.

In the event of prolonged power failures and when the automatic restart function is
activated (p1210 > 1), the drive may have been at a standstill for a long time and
mistakenly considered to have been switched off.

For this reason, entering the area around the drive when it is in this condition can
cause death, serious injury, or considerable material damage.

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0 ... 6

p1210 Automatic restart mode
Factory setting: 0
Setting the automatic restart mode.
Values: 0: Disable automatic restart mode
1: Acknowledge fault after blackout, no automatic restart
2: Automatic restart after blackout
3: Automatic restart after brownout with any fault
4: Automatic restart after brownout
5: Automatic restart after blackout with any fault
6: Automatic restart after blackout or brownout with any fault
A blackout is a supply fault that also affects the electronics power supply.
A brownout is a supply fault that does not affect the electronics power supply.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 9-5
Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions 11/03

Setting range: 1 ... 10

p1211 Automatic restart starting attempts
Factory setting: 3
Setting for the automatic restart attempts of the automatic restart function.
If the active faults could not be acknowledged within the current waiting time (derived from p1212 and
p1213) or if new faults are present, this number is decremented internally.
Automatic restart is aborted as soon as all starting attempts have been made.
The internal counter is set to p1211, however, as soon as 4 seconds of waiting time have elapsed since
the last successful starting attempt.
This parameter setting is active when p1210 = 2 ... 6.

Automatic restart waiting time first starting Setting range: 0.5 ... 10.0 s
p1212
attempt Factory setting: 1.0 s
Setting for the waiting time after the first starting attempt.
Another startup is not possible until the waiting time has elapsed.
This parameter setting is active when p1210 = 2 ... 6.

Setting range: 0.0 ... 10.0 s

p1213 Automatic restart waiting time increment
Factory setting: 0.0 s
Setting for the waiting time increment of the automatic restart function.
The active waiting time is determined with p1212 and p1213. With every unsuccessful starting attempt,
the time is increased by p1213 (exception: p1213 is not taken into account with the first starting attempt).
This parameter setting is active when p1210 = 2 ... 6.

Settings
To prevent the motor from switching into phase opposition when the drive is being
restarted, there is a delay while the motor demagnetizes (t = 2.3 x motor
magnetization time constant). Once this time has elapsed, the inverter is enabled
and the motor is supplied with power.

SINAMICS G150
9-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions

9.3.3 Flying Restart

Description
This function allows the cabinet unit to switch to a motor that is still rotating.
Switching the cabinet unit on without the flying restart function would cause an
overcurrent because the flow in the motor still has to build up and the open-
loop/closed-loop control must be set in accordance with the speed of the motor.
Two different situations are possible here:
a.) The drive rotates as a result of external influences, such as water (pump
drives) or air (fan drives). In this case, the drive can also rotate against the
direction of rotation.
b.) The drive rotates as a result of a previous shutdown, such as OFF 2 or a
power failure. The drive slowly coasts to a stop as a result of the kinetic energy
stored in the drive train (example: induced-draft fan with a high inertia load and
a steeply descending load characteristic in the lower speed range).

NOTE
The flying restart function must be used when the motor may still be running or is
being driven by the load to prevent shutdowns due to overcurrent.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 9-7
Monitoring, Functions, and Protective Functions 11/03

Setting Parameters

Setting range: 0 ... 6

p1200 Flying restart operating mode
Factory setting: 1
Setting the flying restart mode.
Values: 0: Flying restart is disabled
1: Flying restart is always active, start in direction of setpoint
2: Flying restart is active, with line ON, error, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint
3: Flying restart is active, with error, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint
4: Flying restart is always active, in direction of setpoint only
5: Flying restart is active, with line ON, error, OFF2, in direction of setpoint only
6: Flying restart is active, with error, OFF2, in direction of setpoint only
In operating modes 1 to 3, the search is carried out in both directions; in operating modes 4 to 6, the
search is carried out in the setpoint direction only.

Setting range: 10 ... 400 %

p1202 Flying restart detection current
Factory setting: 100 %
Defines the detection current for the flying restart function. The value refers to the rated motor current.

Setting range: 10 ... 400 %

p1203 Flying restart search rate
Factory setting: 100 %
This factor influences the rate at which the output frequency changes during the flying restart.
The higher the value, the longer the search time.

Settings

9.4 Protective Functions

(in preparation)

SINAMICS G150
9-8 Operating Manual
10 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms
10
10.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• Troubleshooting
• Service and support offered by Siemens AG

6 7 5
Setpoint channel Closed-loop control

Cabinet operator panel

M
~

PROFIBUS 8

Input terminals Output terminals

-A60 -A60

10 9
Diagnosis Faults / alarms Monitoring Functions Protective functions

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-1
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

10.2 Troubleshooting
This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the
measures you need to take to rectify them.

NOTE
If errors or malfunctions occur in the cabinet unit, you must carefully check the possible
causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them. If you cannot identify the cause of the
problem or you discover that components are defective, your regional office or sales office
should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail.

10.2.1 Fault Diagnosis with LEDs

Control Unit CU 320 (-A10)

Table 10-1 Description of the LEDs

LED Color State Description

--- OFF Electronics power supply out of permissible
tolerance range
Green Continuously lit Control unit 320 is ready for operation

RDY Flashing 2 Hz Writing to CompactFlash Card

(ready) Red Continuously lit At least one fault is present (e.g. RESET,
watchdog monitoring, basic system error).
Control unit 320 is booting
Flashing 0.5 Hz Boot error (e.g. firmware cannot be loaded to
the RAM)
Green Flashing 0.5 Hz Control unit 320 is ready for operation
Red No software licenses for the device
Orange Continuously lit Firmware loading to RAM
Flashing 0.5 Hz Unable to load firmware to RAM
Flashing 2 Hz Firmware CRC error
--- OFF Electronics power supply outside the
permissible tolerance range
Control unit 320 is not ready for operation
No Option Board
DP1 Green Continuously lit PROFIBUS is ready for communication and
(PROFIBUS cyclic communication is taking place
cyclic Flashing 0.5 Hz PROFIBUS is ready for communication and
operation) cyclic communication is not taking place
Red Continuously lit Cyclic communication has been interrupted.

SINAMICS G150
10-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

--- OFF Electronics power supply outside the

permissible tolerance range
Control unit 320 is not ready for operation
No Option Board
OPT Green Continuously lit Option is ready for operation
(option) Flashing 0.5 Hz Depends on the board option used
Red Continuously lit At least one fault is present in the board
Board option not ready for operation (e.g. after
power-on)
MOD --- OFF Reserved
(SIMOTION) Green Continuously lit Reserved

Customer Terminal Block TM 31 (-A60)

Table 10-2 Description of the LEDs

LED Color State Description

READY --- OFF Electronics power supply out of permissible
tolerance range
Green Continuously lit Customer terminal block ready for operation
Orange Continuously lit DRIVE CliQ communication is being
established.
Red Continuously lit Fault present
Red Flashing 2 Hz Firmware is being downloaded.
Green Component recognition via LED is activated
(p0154)

CIB – Converter Interface Module (-U1)

Table 10-3 Description of the LEDs

LED Color State Description

READY --- Off Electronics power supply out of permissible
tolerance range
Green Continuously lit Motor Module ready for operation
Orange Continuously lit DRIVE CliQ communication is being
established.
Red Continuously lit At least one fault is present.
DC LINK --- Off Electronics power supply out of permissible
tolerance range
Yellow Continuously lit DC link voltage in the permissible tolerance
range (only when the Motor Module is ready for
operation)
Red Continuously lit DC link voltage outside the permissible
tolerance range (only when the Motor Module is
ready for operation)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-3
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

10.2.2 Diagnosis via Parameters

Diagnostic Parameters for the Device Status

r0002 Drive status

Display of drive status.

r0046 Missing enable signals

Display of the missing enable signals.
Bit 00: Enable OFF1 0: present 1: missing
Bit 01: Enable OFF2 0: present 1: missing
Bit 02: Enable OFF3 0: present 1: missing
Bit 03: Operation enabled 0: present 1: missing
Bit 08: Enable SH 0: present 1: missing
Bit 09: Enable infeed 0: present 1: missing
Bit 10: Enable ramp generator 0: present 1: missing
Bit 11: Ramp generator start 0: present 1: missing
Bit 12: Enable setpoint 0: present 1: missing
Bit 17: Int. enable OFF2 0: present 1: missing
Bit 18: Int. enable OFF3 0: present 1: missing
Bit 21: Int. enable STOP2 0: present 1: missing
Bit 27: Demagnetization 0: complete 1: not complete

Value 0 indicates that all the enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p0840 is set to 0 signal.
Power-on disable is present.
Bit 01 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p0844 or p0845 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 02 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p0848 or p0849 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p0852 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 08 = 1 (no enable) when: No pulse enable on the motor module (X21.3, X21.4)
Bit 09 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p0864 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 10 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p1140 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 11 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p1141 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 12 = 1 (no enable) when: The signal source in p1142 is set to 0 signal.
Bit 17 = 1 (no enable) when: Commissioning mode is set (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0).
Bit 18 = 1 (no enable) when: OFF3 or fault reaction OFF3 is not yet complete.
The bit is reset with the power-on disable function.
Bit 21 = 1 (no enable) when: The holding brake is applied or has not yet been released.
The motor is not yet magnetized.
Bit 27 = 1 (no enable) when: Demagnetization is not yet complete.

SINAMICS G150
10-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

r0050 Active command data set (CDS)

Display of the active command data set (CDS).

Diagnostic Parameters for Digital Inputs/Outputs

r0721 Actual terminal value CU320 digital inputs

Display of the digital input status.
Bit 00: DI 0 (X122.1) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 01: DI 1 (X122.2) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 02: DI 2 (X122.3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 03: DI 3 (X122.4) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 04: DI 4 (X132.1) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 05: DI 5 (X132.2) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 06: DI 6 (X132.3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 07: DI 7 (X132.4) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 08: DI/DO 8 (X122.7) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 09: DI/DO 9 (X122.8) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 10: DI/DO 10 (X122.10) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 11: DI/DO 11 (X122.11) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 12: DI/DO 12 (X132.7) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 13: DI/DO 13 (X132.8) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 14: DI/DO 14 (X132.10) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 15: DI/DO 15 (X132.11) 0: OFF 1: ON

r0747 Status of digital outputs (CU320)

Display of the digital output status.
Bit 08: DI/DO 8 (X122.7) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 09: DI/DO 9 (X122.8) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 10: DI/DO 10 (X122.10) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 11: DI/DO 11 (X122.11) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 12: DI/DO 12 (X132.7) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 13: DI/DO 13 (X132.8) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 14: DI/DO 14 (X132.10) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 15: DI/DO 15 (X132.11) 0: OFF 1: ON

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-5
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

r4022 Status of TM31 digital inputs

Display of the digital input status.
Bit 00: DI 0 (X520.1) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 01: DI 1 (X520.2) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 02: DI 2 (X520.3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 03: DI 3 (X520.4) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 04: DI 4 (X530.1) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 05: DI 5 (X530.2) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 06: DI 6 (X530.3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 07: DI 7 (X530.4) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 08: DI/DO 8 (X541.2) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 09: DI/DO 9 (X541.3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 10: DI/DO 10 (X541.4) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 11: DI/DO 11 (X541.5) 0: OFF 1: ON

r4047 Status of TM31 digital outputs

Display of the TM31 digital output status.
Bit 00: DO 0 (X542.1-3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 01: DO 1 (X542.4-6) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 08: DO 8 (X541.2) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 09: DO 9 (X541.3) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 10: DO 10 (X541.4) 0: OFF 1: ON
Bit 11: DO 11 (X541.5) 0: OFF 1: ON

SINAMICS G150
10-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

10.2.3 Indicating and Rectifying Faults

The cabinet unit features a wide range of functions that protect the drive against
damage if a fault occurs (faults and alarms).

Indicating Faults and Alarms

If a fault occurs, the drive indicates the fault and/or alarm on the cabinet operator
panel. Faults are indicated by the red "FAULT" LED and a fault screen is
automatically displayed. You can use the F1 Help function to call up information
about the cause of the fault and how to remedy it. You can use F5 Ack. to
acknowledge a stored fault.
Any alarms are displayed by the yellow flashing "ALARM" LED. The system also
displays a note in the status bar providing information on the cause.
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the error
occurred and the time it was rectified. The time stamp relates to the relative system
time in milliseconds (r0969).

What is a Fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional
(unwanted) status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an
external fault triggered, for example, from the winding temperature monitor for the
asynchronous motor. The faults are displayed and can be reported to a higher-level
control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory default setting, the message
"converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have rectified the cause of
the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.

What is an Alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive. It does not
result in the drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged.
Alarms are "self acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the
cause of the alarm has been eliminated.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-7
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

10.3 Service and Support

Service and Support Helpline
If you need help and do not know who to contact, we make sure that you receive
all the help you need as quickly as possible.
The helpline ensures that a specialist in your area can provide you with
professional support. The helpline (in Germany, for example) is available 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. German and English are spoken.
Tel.: 0180 50 50 111
Online Support
Our round-the-clock, worldwide online support service provides quick and efficient
support in five languages. The comprehensive Internet-based information system,
which is available round the clock, provides product support, services, and support
tools in the shop.
Online support provides a wide range of technical information:
• FAQs, tips and tricks, downloads, current news
• Manuals
• Helpful programs and software products
http://www.siemens.de/automation/service&support
Field Service
If your plant is down and you need fast, on-site help, we can provide the specialists
with the required expertise wherever you are.
With our comprehensive service network, we offer professional and reliable
expertise to get your plant up and running again as quickly as possible.
Experts are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Tel.: 0180 50 50 444
Of course, we can also arrange special service contracts tailored to your specific
requirements. For details, please contact your Siemens office.
Spare Parts and Repairs
Our global network of regional spare parts warehouses and repair centers enables
us to respond quickly and reliably with modern logistics procedures.
During the operational phase of your machinery, we provide a comprehensive
repairs and spare parts service to ensure maximum operational reliability. Our
service includes expert advice with technical problems, and a wide range of
product and system support services tailored to your needs.
For more information about repairs or spare parts, please call the following number
(in Germany):
Tel.: 0180 50 50 446
You can call this number outside office hours and at the weekend to contact our
emergency spare parts service.

SINAMICS G150
10-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Technical Support
We offer technical support in both German and English for deploying products,
systems, and solutions in drive and automation technology.
In special cases, help is available from professional, trained, and experienced
specialists via teleservice and video conferencing.
Free Contact – providing you with free technical support
• In Europe / Africa
Tel.: +49 (0)180 50 50 222
Fax: +49 (0)180 50 50 223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
• in America
Tel.: +14232622522
Fax: +14232622289
E-mail: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com
• Asia / Pacific region
Tel.: +86 1064 757575
Fax: +86 1064 747474
E-mail: adsupport.asia@siemens.com

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-9
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

10.4 Alarms and Faults

If a fault occurs, the drive indicates the fault and/or alarm. Faults and alarms are
listed in a fault/alarm list together with the following information:
• Fault/alarm number
• Standard drive response
• Description of the possible cause of the fault/alarm
• Description of the procedure for rectifying the problem
• Standard fault acknowledgement after it has been rectified

10.4.1 "External Warning 1"

Causes
Warning A7850 ("External Warning 1") is triggered by the following optional
protection devices in the cabinet unit:
• Thermistor motor protection unit alarm (option L83)
• PT100 evaluation unit (option L86)
Remedy
When a fault is indicated, the following procedure is recommended:
1. Identify the cause by examining the specified devices (display or LEDs).
2. Check the fault display on the relevant protection device and establish the fault.
3. Rectify the displayed fault with the help of the appropriate operating instructions
provided in "Additional Operating Instructions".

10.4.2 "External Fault 1"

Causes
Fault code F7860 ("External Fault 1") is triggered by the following optional
protection devices in the cabinet unit:
• Thermistor motor protection unit shutdown (option L84)
• PT100 evaluation unit (option L86)
Remedy
When a fault is indicated, the following procedure is recommended:
1. Identify the cause by examining the specified devices (display or LEDs).
2. Check the fault display on the relevant protection device and establish the fault.
3. Rectify the displayed fault with the help of the appropriate operating instructions
provided in "Additional Operating Instructions".

SINAMICS G150
10-10 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

10.4.3 "External Fault 3"

Causes
Fault code F7862 ("External Fault 3") is triggered when the braking resistor
available with options L61 and L62 is subject to thermal overload, thereby
activating the thermostat. The drive is switched off with OFF2.
Remedy
The cause of the braking resistor overload must be eliminated and the fault code
acknowledged.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-11
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

10.5 List of Faults and Alarms

10.5.1 Explanation of the List of Faults and Alarms

The data in the following example has been chosen at random. A description can
contain the information listed below. Some of the information is optional.
The list of faults and alarms has the following layout:

Fault
Fxxxx Fault name
Reaction: Details of the response when a fault occurs (OFF1, OFF2, NONE, and so on).
Cause: Description of the possible cause of the fault/alarm.
Fault value Detailed troubleshooting information.
(r0949):
Remedy: Description of a procedure for rectifying the problem.
Acknowl.: Description of the fault acknowledgement process after the cause has been rectified.

Alarm
Axxxx Name of the alarm
Cause: Description of the possible cause of the alarm.
Alarm value Detailed troubleshooting information.
(r2124):
Remedy: Description of a procedure for rectifying the alarm.

SINAMICS G150
10-12 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

10.5.2 List of Faults and Alarms

Table 10-4 List of Faults and Alarms

F1000 Internal software error

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value To be diagnosed by Siemens only.
(r0949):
Remedy: - POWER ON for all components (switch off/on).
- Upgrade firmware.
- Contact hotline.
- Replace control unit.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1005 Firmware download DRIVE-CLiQ component failed
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Firmware download to a DRIVE-CLiQ component failed.
Fault value 011: The DRIVE-CliQ component has recognized a checksum error.
(r0949): 015: The content of the firmware file is not accepted by the selected DRIVE-CliQ
component.
140: The firmware file for the DRIVE-CliQ component does not exist on the CompactFlash
card.
156: The component with the specified component number does not exist.
Other values:
To be diagnosed by Siemens only.
Remedy: - Check the selected component number (p7828).
- Store the appropriate firmware file for download in the /siemens/sinamics/code/sac/
directory.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1010 Unknown drive type
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Unknown drive type found.
Fault value Drive object number
(r0949):
Remedy: Check EEPROM data of the drive objects.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1030 Monitoring master control: Sign-of-life failure PC
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: No signs-of-life were received during active PC control priority within the monitoring time.
Control priority has been returned to the active BICO interconnection.
Remedy: Increase the monitoring time on the PC/AOP or switch it off.
WARNING:
The monitoring time must be as short as possible. A long monitoring time results in a
delayed reaction if communication fails!
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1040 You must save your parameter settings and perform a POWER ON
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: A parameter which requires the system to reboot, e.g. p0110, has been changed in the drive
system, e. g. p0110.
Remedy: - Save parameters (p0971/p0977)
- Perform POWER ON for all components (deactivate/activate)
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1041 You must save your parameter settings

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-13
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Reaction: NONE
Cause: Defective files detected on CompactFlash Card during startup.
Remedy: - Repair files
- Save parameters (p0977).
- Fault can be acknowledged after saving
Acknowl.: Immediate
A1100 CU: CompactFlash Card removed
Cause: The CompactFlash card (non-volatile memory) was removed during operation.
Caution:
The CompactFlash card must not be removed or inserted when the system is live.
Remedy: - Switch off the drive system.
- Reinsert the CompactFlash Card that is suitable for the plant.
- Switch the drive system back on.
F1105 CU: Insufficient memory
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: Too many functions, data sets or drives are configured on this control unit.
Remedy: - Change configuration on this control unit.
- Use a different control unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1107 CU: Save to CompactFlash Card failed
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Unable to save data on CompactFlash Card.
- CompactFlash Card defective.
- Insufficient memory on CompactFlash Card.
Remedy: - Try again.
- Use another CompactFlash card.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1110 CU: Only one SINAMICS G at a time may be operated at a Control Unit.
Reaction: NONE
Cause: More than one drive of type SINAMICS G is in operation with the control unit.
Remedy: Only one drive of type SINAMICS G is permitted.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1111 CU: Drive types SINAMICS S/G cannot be combined at a CU
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The drive units SINAMICS S and G are operating together on one control unit.
Remedy: You may only operate equipment of one drive type on one CU.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1205 CU: Time slice overflow
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Insufficient processing time for existing topology.
Remedy: Reduce the number of axes or increase the sampling times.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1210 CU: Basic clock cycle does not match DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The parameter for selecting the basic clock cycle does not match the drive topology. Drives
connected to the same DRIVE-CLiQ port of the control unit have been assigned different
basic clock cycles.
See also: p0111
Remedy: The same basic clock must be selected for drives connected to one and the same. DRIVE-
CLiQ port of the CU (e.g. in series).
See also: p0111
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
10-14 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

F1220 CU: Basic clock cycle too small

Reaction: NONE
Cause: The parameter for the basic clock cycle is set too short for the number of connected drives.
See also: p0110
Remedy: - Increase the basic clock cycle.
- Reduce the number of connected drives and start commissioning the unit again.
See also: p0110
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1221 CU: Basic clock cycle too short (application cannot maintain its clock cycle)
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The application cannot maintain its clock cycle.
Application runtime is simply too long for the particular clock cycle, or the remaining system
time is not sufficient for the application.
Remedy: Increase basic clock cycle of DRIVE-CLiQ communication.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1250 CU: CU-EEPROM Initialization
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Error during initialization of the EEPROM on the control unit.
Fault value 1: Read error RO structure
(r0949): 2: Checksum error RO structure
3: Block setup error RO data
Remedy: POWER ON durchführen
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1255 CU: Option-Slot-EEPROM Initialization
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Error on initializing the option slot EEProm.
Fault value 1: Read error RO structure
(r0949): 2: Checksum error RO structure
3: Block structure error RO data
Remedy: POWER ON durchführen
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1300 Topology: No topology detected or specified
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The number of components connected via DRIVE-CLiQ (incl. the TBxx) or the target device
topology type is zero.
See also: r0098, p0099
Remedy: Connect topology components via DRIVE-CLiQ and switch on CU again.
Accept r0098 in p0099.
See also: p0099
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1305 Topology: Component number missing
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The component number from the topology has not been parameterized (p0121(for AFE only,
s.p0107), p0131(for Servo/Vector drives only, see. p0107), p0141, p0151, p0161).
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0185, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Fault value Fault value contains relevant dataset number.
(r0949): Fault also occurs if speed sensor was configured (p0187 ... p0189) but no component
number exist for them.
The fault value contains the drive data set number in this case, plus. 100*sensor number (e.
g. 3xx, if no component number is entered for the third sensor (p0189) in p0141).
Remedy: Enter the missing component number or remove component and restart commissioning.
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0185, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-15
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

A1320 Topology: Drive object number missing in configuration

Cause: Drive object number missing in p0978.
Alarm value Index of p0101 under which the missing drive object number can be determined.
(r2124):
Remedy: Set p0009 = 1 and modify p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all drive object numbers (see p0101).
- A drive object number must not be repeated.
- 0 may be entered to distinguish between drive with/without PZD.
A1321 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in the configuration
Cause: p0978 contains a non-existent drive object number.
Alarm value Index of p0978 under which the drive object number can be determined.
(r2124):
Remedy: Set p0009 = 1 and modify p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all drive object numbers (see p0101).
- A drive object number must not be repeated.
- 0 may be entered to distinguish between drive with/without PZD.
A1322 Topology: Drive object number present twice in configuration
Cause: p0978 contains a drive object number more than once.
Alarm value Index p0978 where the affected drive object number is located.
(r2124):
Remedy: Set p0009 = 1 and modify p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all drive object numbers (see p0101).
- A drive object number must not be repeated.
- 0 may be entered to distinguish between drive with/without PZD.
A1330 Topology: Quick commissioning not possible
Cause: Unable to perform a quick commissioning. The existing actual topology does not meet the
set requirements.
Alarm value Byte 1
(r2124): 1: Invalid connections were detected for a component.
Byte 2: Component number
Byte 3: Port type
Byte 4: Connection number
2: The topology contains too many components of one type. Byte 2 indicates the number of
requirements not met.
Byte 2 = 1 means: More than one master control unit present
Byte 2 = 2 means: More than one Active Line Module present
Byte 2 = 3 means: More than 6 motor modules present
Byte 2 = 4 means: More than 6 sensors present
Byte 2 = 5 means: More than 2 Terminal Modules present
Byte 2 = 6 means: More than one option slot component present
3: More than 16 components are connected to one DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the control unit.
Byte 2 = 1, 2, 3, 4 means e. g. DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101, X102, X103, X104
4: The number of components connected in sequence is higher than 7.
Byte 2 = Component number of 8th component
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: - Adapt the actual topology to the permissible requirements.
- Perform commissioning via STARTER.
A1331 Topology: Quick commissioning not supported
Cause: Unable to automatically assign a speed sensor and a drive during quick commissioning.

SINAMICS G150
10-16 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Alarm value Component number of non-assigned component

(r2124):
Remedy: Assign speed sensor and evaluation to a drive.
- Increase the number of sensor data sets (p0140)
- Assign evaluation (p0141)
- Assign speed sensor (p0142)
F1340 – Topology: Too many components on one line
F1343
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Communication clock cycle of DRIVE-CLiQ ports insufficient for all write transfers.
The reason is that there are too many DRIVE-CLiQ components for the set communication
clock cycle on a line of the CU.
Remedy: - Increase basic clock cycle
- Check DRIVE-CLiQ cabling: The DRIVE-CLiQ ports of the CU should be interconnected to
the same number of components.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1344 – Topology: too many components connected
F1346
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Internal buffer overrun for useful data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Remedy: Check DRIVE-CLiQ connection: The DRIVE-CLiQ ports of the CU should be interconnected
to the same number of components.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1350 Topology: Unable to read actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Cause: An error has occurred reading the actual topology from r9900 and r9901.
Remedy: Execute a POWER ON
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1351 Topology: Actual topology Unable to write
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Cannot write actual topology internally in r9900 and r9901. As a result, the actual topology
cannot be read out correctly.
Remedy: Execute a POWER ON
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1352 Topology: Unable to determine actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Unable to determine actual topology.
- Insufficient memory.
- Internal access to parameter failed.
- Unknown node identifier for a component
Remedy: - Reduce the number of data sets or drives.
- Perform POWER ON.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1355 Topology: Actual topology modified
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The number of components connected via DRIVE-CLiQ (incl. TBxx) is zero or it has been
changed after initial start-up.
This error occurs only if the topology is commissioned via the internal automatic option and
not with the PC tool.
See also: r0098, p0099

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-17
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Remedy: The following remedial actions are available if no errors have occurred in the topology
detection run:
- restore the original wiring and reapply voltage to the CU.
- Change the unit parameterization to match the wiring (only possible via ES tool).
- Restore factory settings for the entire unit (all drives) and enable automatic self-
commissioning.
See also: r0098
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1360 Topology: Actual topology No. of components exceeded
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Too many components detected at the Control Unit during determination of the actual
topology. The maximum permissible number of components is 199.
Remedy: Change the configuration. Link less than 199 components to the control unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1370 Topology: Actual topology Ring connection
Reaction: NONE
Cause: A ring-shaped connection was detected during detection of the actual topology.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number of a component contained in the ring
(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the specified connection.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1371 Topology: Actual topology Ring connection with Control Unit
Reaction: NONE
Cause: A ring-shaped connection including the control unit was detected during detection of the
actual topology.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number on components connected to the control unit
(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the specified connection.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1375 Topology: Actual topology Duplicate connection between two components
Reaction: NONE
Cause: A duplicate connection between 2 components was detected in the actual topology.

SINAMICS G150
10-18 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Fault value Byte 1: Component number of a component connected twice

(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number 1 of duplicated connection
Byte 4: Connection number 2 of duplicated connection

Example:
Fault value = 33751316 dec = 2030114 hex
Byte 4 = 02 hex = 2 dec, Byte 3 = 03 hex = 3 dec, Byte 2 = 01 hex = 1 dec, Byte 1 = 14 hex
= 20 dec

Connection type:
1: DRIVE-CLiQ
2: Option slot
3: Other connections (e.g. EnDat, SSI)
4: Power connection
5: Incremental sensor connection
6: Resolver connection
7: Incremental sensor connection

Connection number:
A number that corresponds to the relevant connection or socket number consecutively
starting at one (e.g. DRIVE- CLiQ connection X100 on the CU has connection number 1)
Remedy: Output the fault values and remove one or both of the specified connections.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1380 Topology: Actual topology Defective EEPROM detected
Reaction: NONE
Cause: A component with a defective EEPROM was detected during actual topology recognition.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number of the defective component
(r0949):
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the defected component.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F1400 Topology: Comparison not possible
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Unable to perform comparison between actual and target topology.
Fault value 1: Insufficient dynamic memory
(r0949): 2: No target topology present
3: No actual topology present
Remedy: Execute a POWER ON
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1405 Topology: Comparison error cannot be cleared automatically
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Unable to correct differences between actual and target topology automatically.
Fault value Byte 1: Number of differences that cannot be corrected automatically
(r0949): Byte 2: Number of differences that can be corrected automatically (p9904)
Byte 3: Number of differences that can be corrected by unit specialization (p9905)
Automatically correctable differences
- Topology: Serial number comparison different (correctable)
- Topology: Component comparison moved
- Topology: Connection number comparison different (correctable)
Remedy: Changes only one clearable difference in the actual topology. Perform 'clear topology error
automatically' (p9904).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1410 Topology: Comparison Component moved
Reaction: NONE

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-19
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Cause: The topology comparison has detected a moved component in the actual topology
compared to the target topology.
Byte 1 of the fault value indicates the component number of the moved component.. Bytes
2, 3 and 4 describes the connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was
detected.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number of shifted component
(r0949): Byte 2: Component number
Byte 3: Connection type
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Adapt the topologies:
- Undo moving components in the actual topology
- Load target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
- Correct topology errors automatically (p9904)
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1415 Topology: Comparison Additional component in target topology
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Topology comparison has detected a component in the target topology that is not used in
the actual topology.
Fault value Component number of additional target component
(r0949):
Remedy: - Remove the additional components in the target topology and reload the target topology.
- Check the actual topology in line with the target topology and reconnect if necessary.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A1416 Topology comparison: Component also in actual topology
Cause: The topology comparison has found a component in the actual topology which is not
specified in the target topology. The supplementary info describes the connection at which
the additional component was detected.
Alarm value Byte 1: Component number
(r2124): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- Remove the additional components in the actual topology
- Load target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
F1420 Topology: Comparison Different components (F1420: correctable)
F1421
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in
relation to one component. The node identifier or order number are different.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number
(r0949): Byte 2:
1: Different type in node identifier
2: Different order number
3: Different node identifier
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- Check the component cabling in the ES tool against the hardware configuration of the drive
unit and adapt the differences
- Parameterize the topology comparison of all components (p9906)
- Parameterize the topology comparison of one component
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1424 Topology: Comparison Different serial numbers (F1424: correctable)
F1425

SINAMICS G150
10-20 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Reaction: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in
relation to one component. Different serial number.
Fault value Component number
(r0949):
Remedy: Adapting the topologies
- Undo the change made in the actual topology
- Load target topology that matches the actual topology using the ES tool
- Correct topology errors automatically (p9904)
- Parameterize topology comparison of all components (p9906)
- Parameterize topology comparison for one component(p9907, p9908)
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1428 Topology: comparison Different port numbers (F1428: correctable)
F1429
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in
relation to one component. A component was connected to a different connection. The fault
value describes the different connections of the component.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number
(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number in actual topology
Byte 4: Connection number in target topology
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- Reconnect the actual topology in line with the target topology.
- Load the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
- Correct the topology error automatically (p9904)
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1431 Topology: Comparison Different component connection types
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in
relation to one component. The connection types or the number of connections are different.
Fault value Byte 1: Component number
(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Check that the component cabling in ES tool matches the hardware configuration of the
drive unit and adapt any differences.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1450 Topology: Unable to read target topology
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Error reading target topology from p9902 and p9903.
Remedy: Reload the target topology using the commissioning software.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1451 Topology: Unable to write target topology
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Error writing target topology to p9902 and p9903.
Remedy: Reload the target topology using the commissioning software.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1470 Topology: Target topology: Ring connection
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Ring connection originating from the control unit detected on writing target topology to p9902
and p9903.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-21
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Fault value Byte 1: Component number of a component contained in the ring

(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection type
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove one of the specified connections. Then reload the target
topology using the commissioning software.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1471 Topology: Target topology: Ring connection with control unit
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Ring connection originating from the control unit detected on writing target topology to p9902
and p9903
Fault value Byte 1: Component number of the component connected to the control unit
(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove one of the specified connections. Then reload the target
topology using the commissioning software.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1475 Topology: Target topology Duplicate connection between two components
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Double connection between 2 components detected on entering the target topology in
p9902 and p9903
Fault value Byte 1: Component number of a double-connected component
(r0949): Byte 2: Connection type
Byte 3: Connection number 1 of double connection
Byte 4: Connection number 2 of double connection
Note:
The connection type and number are described in F1375.
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the two specified connections. Then reload the target
topology using the commissioning software.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1505 BICO: Interconnection cannot be set up
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The chosen interconnection cannot be set up.
Fault value Parameter to be modified.
(r0949): Exceptions:
922: Interconnection must not be changed because the current selection of the PROFIBUS
telegram in P0922 requires the present one.
Remedy: Set up another interconnection.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1511 BICO: Message: BICO Interconnection Between Different Scalings
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Message: The required interconnection has been established, but a conversion is being
carried out between the BICO output and BICO input.
This occurs when the BICO output is scaled differently to the BICO input, or when you
switch between drives whose p2000 ff reference values are different.
The conversion is carried out using the p2000 ff reference values.
Example:
The BICO output is a voltage and the BICO input is a current. Factor p2002/p2001 is
calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Fault value Parameter number of the signal sink.
(r0949):
Remedy: No action required

SINAMICS G150
10-22 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Acknowl.: Immediate
F1800 DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware/configuration defective
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: An error occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
Fault value 0..3: Port 0..3 has not switched to cyclic mode.
(r0949): The cause may be an incorrect setup or configuration that produces inconsistent
bus timings.
10 : Loss of Drive-CLiQ connection
Cause, e.g. Drive-CLiQ cable has been removed from CU.
This error cannot be acknowledged until communication is cyclic again.
11 : Repeated error for connection ID.
This error cannot be acknowledged until communication is cyclic again.
12 : A connection was detected but exchange of the station ID does not work.
probable cause: defective component.
This error cannot be acknowledged until communication is cyclic again.
Remedy: For fault values 0 ... 3:
- Ensure that the software statuses of the DRIVE-CliQ components are the same.
- Avoid long topologies with short current controller cycles.
For fault value 10:
- Check the DRIVE-CliQ cables on the control unit.
- POWER ON.
For fault value 11:
- Ensure that the cabinet and cabling are EMC compliant.
For fault value 12:
- Replace the affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1801 DRIVE-CLiQ: No communication to component
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: A communication with the DRIVE-CLiQ component indicated by the fault value is not
possible.
Cause may be that a Drive-CLiQ cable has been pulled out.
Remedy: - Check the DRIVE-CliQ cables.
- POWER ON.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1802 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Modification of DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle times requires POWER ON
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Modification of DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle times p0110 is not possible during operation.
Fault value Index of p0110.
(r0949):
Remedy: Save (p0971 = 1), switch OFF and ON again.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
A1900 PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram faulted
Cause: PROFIBUS master is attempting to set up a connection using a wrong configuration
telegram.
Alarm value 50: Syntax error
(r2124): 51: Connection setup to more drives than configured in the unit
52: More than 16 input or output data words for a drive
53: Uneven number of input or output bytes
Remedy: Check the bus configuration:
- Slave configuration
A1901 PROFIBUS: Parameteriz. telegram faulted
Cause: A PROFIBUS master is attempting to set up a connection using an incorrect configuration
telegram.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-23
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Alarm value 10: Impermissible length of an optional parameterization block

(r2124): 11: Impermissible ID of an optional parameterization block
20: Duplicate parameterization block for isochronous operation
21: Errored parameterization block for isochronous operation
22: Errored parameterization bits for isochronous operation
Remedy: Check the bus configuration:
- Bus addresses
- Slave configuration
A1902 PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram not permitted
Cause: -
Alarm value 0: Bus cycle time Tdp < 1 ms
(r2124): 1: Bus cycle time Tdp > 32 ms
2: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a whole multiple of the current control clock cycle.
3: Time of actual value recording Ti > Bus cycle time Tdp
4: Time of actual value recording Ti is not a whole multiple of the current control clock cycle.
5: Time of setpoint transfer To > Bus cycle time Tdp
6: Time of setpoint transfer To is not a whole multiple of the current control clock cycle.
7: Master application cycle time Tmapc is not a whole multiple of the speed control clock
cycle.
8: Bus reserve bus cycle time Tdp - data exchange time Tdx less than two current controller
clock cycles.
9: Bus cycle time Tdp changed compared to first connection setup.
Remedy: - Adapt parameterizing telegram.
- Adapt current or speed control clock cycle.
F1910 PROFIBUS: Setp. Timeout
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: The receipt of setpoints from the PROFIBUS interface is interrupted because the bus
connection is interrupted or the PROFIBUS master is switched off or in the STOP state.
Remedy: Restore the bus link and set the PROFIBUS master to RUN.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1911 PROFIBUS: Clock synchronous clock failure
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: The global control telegram for synchronizing the clock cycles has failed in cyclic mode for
several DP clock cycles or has violated the specified time grid specified in the
parameterization telegram over several consecutive DP clock cycles (see bus cycle times
Tdp and Tpllw).
Remedy: - Check PROFIBUS cable and plug-in connections.
- Check whether the communication interruption is short-term or permanent.
- Check bus or master. for overload (e. g. bus cycle time Tdp set too short).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1912 PROFIBUS: clock synchronous sign of life
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: The maximum permissible number of sign-of-life failures on the master (isochronous
PROFIBUS) has been exceeded in cyclic operation.
Remedy: - Correct the connection of the master sign of life (p2045).
- Check whether the signal of life is being transmitted correctly by the master.
- Check the permissible failure rate of telegrams (p0925).
- Check bus or master for. for overload (e. g. bus cycle time Tdp set too short).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F1920 PROFIBUS: Interruption in cyclic link
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: The cyclic link to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
Remedy: Set up the PROFIBUS link and activate PROFIBUS master in cyclic mode.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
10-24 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

A1921 PROFIBUS: Clock cycle synchronization

Cause: Output data of PROFIBUS master (setpoints) received at wrong time within the PROFIBUS
clock cycle.
Remedy: Check the bus configuration:
- Parameter for clock cycle synchronization: Ensure that time for setpoint acceptance To >
Data Exchange time Tdx
A1930 PROFIBUS: Current controller clock cycle not identical
Cause: Current controller clock cycle of all drives must be set identically for clock-synchronous
PROFIBUS.
Alarm value Number of drive object with different current controller clock cycle.
(r2124):
Remedy: - Set current controller clock cycles to identical values (p0115[0]).
See also: p0115
A1931 PROFIBUS: Speed controller clock cycle not clock-synchronous
Cause: Speed controller clock cycle of all drives for clock synchronous PROFIBUS must be set
identically.
Alarm value Number of the drive object with different speed controller clock cycle.
(r2124):
Remedy: - Set speed controller clock cycles to identical value (p0115[1]).
See also: p0115
A1940 PROFIBUS: Clock synchronism not achieved
Cause: The PROFIBUS is in the Data Exchange state and isochronous operation has been selected
via the parameterizing telegram. Synchronization to the clock cycle specified by the master
and to the master sign-of-life was not possible.
- Master does not send global control telegram although isochronous mode was selected via
bus configuration.
- Master uses a different isochronous DP clock cycle than transferred to the slave in the
parameterization telegram.
- Master does not increment its sign-of-life (CTW2 Bit 12-15) in the configured time frame
Tmapc.
Remedy: - Check master application and bus configuration.
- Check consistency between clock cycle input for slave configuration and clock cycle setting
at the master.
If the bus clock cycle Tdp is not equal to master application cycle time Tmapc:
- Correct interconnection of the master sign of life (p2045).
- Check whether the sign of life was sent correctly by the master.
A1941 PROFIBUS: Clock cycle signal missing for bus setup
Cause: The PROFIBUS is in the Data Exchange state and isochronous operation has been selected
via the parameterizing telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is not being
received.
Remedy: Check master application and bus configuration.
A1943 PROFIBUS: Clock cycle faulted during bus setup
Cause: The PROFIBUS is in the Data Exchange state and isochronous operation has been selected
via the parameterizing telegram. The global control telegram for synchronism is received
irregularly.
- The master sends an irregular global control telegram.
- The master uses a different isochronous DP clock cycle than the one transferred to the
slave in the parameterization telegram.
Remedy: - Check master application and bus configuration.
- Check consistency of the clock cycle entered for the slave configuration and the clock
cycle setting at the master.
F1950 PROFIBUS: Synchronization clock-synchronous mode failed
Reaction: OFF1

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-25
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Cause: Synchronization of the internal clock cycle with the global control telegram has failed. The
internal clock cycle exhibits an unexpected shift.
Remedy: Siemens-internal
Acknowl.: Immediate
A2000 Function generator: Start not possible
Cause: The function generator has already been started.
Remedy: Stop and, if necessary, restart the function generator.
See also: p4800
A2005 Function generator: Specified drive does not exist
Cause: The drive object specified for connection does not exist.
Remedy: Use an existing drive object with the appropriate number.
See also: p4815
A2006 Function generator: No drive specified for connection
Cause: No drive specified for connection in p4815.
See also: p4815
Remedy: At least one drive must be specified for connection in p4815.
See also: p4815
A2007 Function generator: Drive for connection is not a servo drive
Cause: The drive object specified for connection is not a SERVO.
See also: p4815
Remedy: Use a SERVO drive object with the appropriate number.
A2010 Function generator: Speed setpoint of a drive not equal to zero
Cause: The speed setpoint of a drive specified for connection is greater than the value set via p1226
for zero speed detection.
Alarm value Number of the affected drive object.
(r2124):
Remedy: Set the speed setpoints of all drives specified for connection to zero.
A2011 Function generator: Speed value of a drive not equal to zero
Cause: The actual speed value of a drive specified for connection is greater than the value set via
p1226 for zero speed detection.
Alarm value Number of the affected drive object.
(r2124):
Remedy: Before you start the function generator, set the drive speed to zero.
A2020 Function generator: Parameter cannot be changed
Cause: No configuration parameter may be changed when the function generator is active
(p4800=1).
See also: p4810, p4812, p4813, p4815, p4820, p4821, p4822, p4823, p4824, p4825, p4826,
p4827, p4828, p4829
Remedy: - Stop the function generator before parameterization (p4800 = 0).
- If necessary, start the function generator (p4800 = 1).
See also: p4800
A2025 Function generator: Period too short
Cause: The value for the pulse duration is too small.
See also: p4821
Remedy: Check and adapt the value for the period.
See also: p4821
A2026 Function generator: Pulse width too long
Cause: The set pulse width is too long.
See also: p4821, p4822
Remedy: The pulse width must be shorter than the period. Reduce the pulse width.
See also: p4822

SINAMICS G150
10-26 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

A2030 Function generator: Physical address equals zero

Cause: The specified physical address has the value zero.
See also: p4812
Remedy: Set the physical address to a different value than zero.
See also: p4812
A2040 Function generator: Impermissible value for offset
Cause: Offset value greater than upper limit or less than the lower limit.
See also: p4826
Remedy: Change the offset accordingly.
See also: p4826, p4828, p4829
A2041 Function generator: Impermissible value for bandwidth
Cause: The set bandwidth is either too small or too large.
See also: p4823
Remedy: Check value for bandwidth and adapt if necessary.
See also: p4823
A2045 Function generator: Inconsistent limit values
Cause: The values for the upper and lower limits are inconsistent.
The value for the lower limit must always be less than the value for the upper limit.
See also: p4828, p4829
Remedy: Check the limit values and adjust if necessary.
See also: p4828, p4829
A2050 Trace: Unable to start
Cause: Trace already started.
See also: p4700
Remedy: Stop and, if necessary, restart the trace.
A2055 Trace: Trace duration too short
Cause: The value for the trace duration is too short. Minimum length = twice the value of the trace
cycle.
See also: p4720, p4721
Remedy: Check the value for the trace duration and adjust if necessary.
A2056 Trace: Trace cycle too small
Cause: The selected trace cycle is less than the set basic clock cycle 0 (p0110[0]).
See also: p0110, p4720
Remedy: Increase the value for the trace cycle.
A2060 Trace: Signal to be traced is missing
Cause: - You have not specified a signal to be traced.
- The specified signals are not valid.
See also: p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733
Remedy: - Specify a signal to be traced (p4730 ... p4733).
- Check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A2061 Trace: Invalid signal
Cause: The selected signal is invalid. Possible causes:
- Specified signal does not exist
- Specified signal cannot be traced.
See also: p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733
Remedy: - Specify a signal to be traced (p4730 ... p4733).
- Check whether the signal can be traced.
A2062 Trace: Trigger signal invalid

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-27
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Cause: The selected trigger signal is invalid. Possible causes:

- No trigger signal specified (required only if p4710 not equal to 1)
- Specified signal does not exist
- Specified signal cannot be used as a trigger signal for the trace.
See also: p4711
Remedy: Specify a valid trigger signal (p4711).
See also: p4711
A2063 Trace: Invalid data type
Cause: The data type specified for signal selection via the physical address is invalid.
See also: p4711, p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733
Remedy: Use a valid data type.
A2070 Trace: Parameter cannot be changed
Cause: When the trace is active (p4700 = 1), you cannot change its parameters.
See also: p4700, p4710, p4711, p4712, p4713, p4714, p4715, p4716, p4720, p4721, p4722,
p4730, p4731, p4732, p4733, p4755, p4780, p4781, p4782, p4783, p4789
Remedy: - Stop the trace before parameterization (p4800 = 0).
- If necessary, start the trace (p4700 = 1).
A2075 Trace: Pretrigger time too long
Cause: The set pretrigger time must be smaller than the trace duration.
See also: p4721, p4722
Remedy: Check the pretrigger time and adjust if necessary.
A2099 Trace: Out of memory
Cause: The remaining memory on the control unit is not sufficient for the trace function.
Note:
The available memory on the control unit can be read via r4795.
The memory requirement of the trace is displayed in r4708.
Remedy: Reduce memory requirement as follows:
- Reduce the trace duration
- Increase the trace clock cycle
- Reduce the number of signals to be traced
See also: r4708, r4799
F3500 TM: Initialization
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: An internal software error occurred while initializing the TM, the CU terminals, or the TB30.
Fault value The thousands digit = 1... 3
(r0949): Ones, tens and hundreds places indicate the component ID of the affected TM.
Remedy: Switch the power supply to the CU off and on again. Check DRIVE-CLiQ connection. The
TM should be connected directly to a DRIVE-CLiQ port at the CU. If the error recurs, replace
the TM module.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F3505 TM: Analog Input Wire Break
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Input current of analog input of TM has exceeded the threshold parameterized in p4061[x].
This fault can only occur if p4056[x] = 3 (4... 20mA with monitoring).
Index x = 0: analog input 0 (X522.1 to .3)
Index x = 1: analog input 1 (X522.4 to .5)
Fault value The ones, tens and hundreds places indicate the component ID (r0151) of the affected TM.
(r0949): The thousands place indicates the affected analog input : 0: analog input 0 (AI0), 1: analog
input 1 (AI1)
Remedy: Check connection to signal source for interruptions. Check level of induced current (infeed
signal may be too low). Ensure that the input has a load resistance of 250Ohm. The input
current measured by the TM can be output in r4052[x].
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
10-28 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

F3590 TM: Module not ready

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The affected terminal module is not sending a ready signal or valid cyclic data.
Fault value Drive object number
(r0949):
Remedy: - Check the 24 V supply.
- Check the DRIVE CliQ connection.
Acknowl.: Immediately
A5000 Power section: Overtemperature heatsink
Cause: Warning threshold for overtemperature on inverter heatsink has been reached. The reaction
is set in p0290.
Remedy: Check the following points:
- Does the ambient temperature lie within the defined limits?
- Are the load conditions and the duty cycle configured correctly?
- Has the cooling failed?
A5001 Power section: Overtemperature Chip
Cause: Warning threshold for overtemperature of power semiconductors of inverter has been
reached. The reaction is set in p0290.
Remedy: Check the following points:
- Does the ambient temperature lie within the defined limits?
- Are the load conditions and the duty cycle configured correctly?
- Has the cooling failed?
- Pulse frequency too high?
A5002 Power section: Overtemperature Intake air
Cause: Warning threshold for inlet air overtemperature has been reached. The reaction is set in
p0290.
Remedy: Check the following points:
- Does the ambient temperature lie within the defined limits?
- Has the cooling failed?
A5003 Power section: Overtemperature Electronic module
Cause: Warning threshold for overtemperature of Ebox has been reached. The reaction is set in
p0290.
Remedy: Check the following points:
- Does the ambient temperature lie within the defined limits?
- Has the cooling failed?
A5004 Power section: Over temperature DC converter
Cause: Warning threshold for rectifier overtemperature has been reached. The reaction is set in
p0290.
Remedy: Check the following points:
- Does the ambient temperature lie within the defined limits?
- Are the load conditions and the duty cycle configured correctly?
- Has the cooling failed?
- Line phase failure?
- Branch of input DC converter defective?
F7011 Drive: Motor Overtemperature
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Motor temperature has reached the fault threshold parameterized in (p0605).
- Motor is overloaded.
- Motor ambient temperature too high.
Remedy: - Reduce motor load.
- Check ambient temperature.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-29
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

A7015 Drive: Motor temperature sensor

Cause: Temperature sensor error due to wire break, short-circuit or sensor not connected. The
model value is applied for monitoring the temperature of asynchronous motors. Temperature
monitoring deactivated for synchronous machines.
Remedy: - Check sensor for correct connection.
- Check parameterization (p0600).
F7016 Drive: Motor temperature sensor error
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Temperature sensor error occurred while evaluating the temperature sensor specified in
p0600.
Possible causes: wire break, short-circuit, sensor not properly connected.
Remedy: - Check sensor for correct connection.
- Check parameterization (p0600).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7080 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameterization error
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e. B. p0350 = Rstator
= 0).
See also: p0300, p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0640,
p1082, p1300
Fault value Fault value contains the affected parameter number.
(r0949):
Remedy: Modify parameter indicates in fault value (r0949) (e. g. p0640 = current limit > 0).
See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0640, p1082
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7085 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters modified
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Forced modification of open-loop/closed-loop control parameters, since they have exceeded
the dynamic limits of other parameters.
See also: p0640, p1082, p1300, p1800
Fault value Fault value contains the number of the modified parameter.
(r0949):
Remedy: You do not need to change the parameters again as they have already been correctly
limited.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7090 Drive: Upper torque limit less than lower torque limit
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The upper torque limit is less than the lower torque limit.
Remedy: If you connect parameter P1 to p1522 and parameter P2 to p1523, you must make sure that
P1 >= P2.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7100 Drive: Sampling times cannot be reset
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The sampling times in p0111, p0112, p0115 cannot be reset at the same time as the drive
parameters (p0971).
See also: p0110
Remedy: Continue working with the set sampling times or reset the basic clock cycle p0110.0 to its
original value before you reset the drive parameters.
See also: p0110
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7110 Drive: Sampling times are not congruent with the basic clock
Reaction: NONE

SINAMICS G150
10-30 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Cause: The parameterized sampling times are not congruent with the basic clock cycle.
See also: p0110, p0111, p0115
Remedy: Enter sampling times as integral of basic clock cycle. Note which basic clock cycle is
selected in p0111. Furthermore, the sampling times in p0115 can only be changed manually
in the sampling times preset 'Expert' (p0112).
See also: p0110, p0111, p0112, p0115
Acknowl.: Immediate
A7200 Drive: Master control ON/OFF1 command present
Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is not 0, either via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or in control
word p3982 bit 0.
Remedy: The signal at binector input p0840 (current CDS) as well as p3982 bit 0 must be 0.
F7220 Drive: PLC control removed during operation
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: PLC control signal removed during operation.
- Interconnection of binector input for PLC control wrong (p0854).
- Superimposed control has removed the PLC control signal during operation.
- Field bus connector (master drive) withdrawn during operation.
- If this drive is to continue to run after removal of PLC control , the error reaction should be
parameterized to no reaction.
Remedy: - Check interconnection of binector input for PLC control (p0854).
- Check signal PLC control and activate if necessary.
- Check field bus connector (master drive).
- If this drive is to continue to run after removal of PLC control , the error reaction should be
parameterized to no reaction.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7300 Drive: Main contactor no checkback
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: - Unable to activate the main contactor within the time parameterized in p0861.
- Unable to deactivate the main contactor within the time parameterized in .
- Main contactor closed during operation.
- Main contactor activated although converter is deactivated.
Remedy: - Check setting of p0860.
- Check feedback loop of main contactor.
- Increase monitoring time in p0861.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7320 Drive: Automatic restart aborted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: - The specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been used up since the alarms could
not be acknowledged within the waiting time defined by p1212 and p1213.. On each start,
the number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented.
- No active ON command present.
- If p1210 = 2, the start attempt is aborted because at least one alarm is present.
- If p1210 = 3 or 4, the start attempt is aborted because at least one alarm is present
following activation of the electronics.
- The monitoring time of the power section (p0857) has expired.
- Restart is not possible after incorrect motor identification.
Remedy: - Increase number of restart attempts (p1211). The current number of restart attempts is
displayed in r1214.
- Increase the waiting time in p1212 and/or in p1213.
- Apply an ON command (p0840).
- Increase the monitoring time of the power section in p0857 or deactivate.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A7350 Drive: Probe terminal parameterized as digital output
Cause: Probe is connected to a bidirectional digital input/output and the terminal is set as output.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-31
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Alarm value 9: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)

(r2124): 10: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
11: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
13: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
14: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
15: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Remedy: - Set terminal as input (p0728).
- Deselect probe (p0488, p0489).
A7400 Drive:: DC link voltage maximum controller active
Cause: DC-link voltage controller has been activated because the voltage has exceeded the upper
activation threshold (r1242).
Ramp down times are increased automatically to keep the DC link voltage (r0026) within the
permissible limit. Control deviation between set and actual speed. The output of the RFG is
therefore set to the actual speed on deactivation of the DC link voltage controller.
See also: p1240
Remedy: none
A7401 Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated
Cause: The Vdc max controller could not hold the DC Link voltage (r0026) below the limit (r1242)
and was therefore deactivated.
- Line voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power section.
- Motor is permanently in regenerative mode (driven by a load).
Remedy: - Check whether the input voltage lies inside the permissible range.
- Check whether the load cycle and load limits lie inside the permissible ranges.
A7402 Drive: Link minimum controller active
Cause: The DC-link voltage controller has been activated because the voltage has dropped below
the lower activation limit (r1246). The motor's kinetic energy is used to buffer the DC link.
This decelerates the drive.
See also: p1240
Remedy: Warning disappears when power supply returns.
F7410 Drive: Current controller output limited
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: - Motor not corrected or motor contactor open.
- No DC link voltage present.
- Motor module defective.
Remedy: - Connect motor or check motor contactor.
- Check DC link voltage (r0070).
- Check motor module.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7411 Drive: Flux controller output limited
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Unable to achieve specified flux setpoint, although 90 % of maximum current is specified.
- Wrong motor data.
- Motor data and motor switching mode (star/delta) do not match.
- Current limit set too low for motor.
- Motor module too small.
Remedy: - Correct motor data.
- Check switching mode of motor.
- Correct current limits (p0640, p0323).
- If necessary, use a larger motor module.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7420 Drive: Current setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE

SINAMICS G150
10-32 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Cause: One of the filter natural frequencies is higher than the Shannon frequency. The Shannon
frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0].
Fault value Bit 0: Filter 1 (p1658, p1660)
(r0949): Bit 1: Filter 2 (p1663, p1665)
Bit 2: Filter 3 (p1668, p1670)
Bit 3: Filter 4 (p1673, p1675)
Remedy: - Reduce the numerator or denominator natural frequency of affected current setpoint filter.
- Reduce current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
- Deactivate affected filter (p1656).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7421 Drive: Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE
Cause: One of the filter natural frequencies is higher than the Shannon frequency. The Shannon
frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[1].
Fault value Bit 0: Filter 1 (p1417, p1419)
(r0949): Bit 1: Filter 2 (p1423, p1425)
Remedy: - Reduce the numerator or denominator natural frequency of the affected speed setpoint
filter.
- Reduce the speed controller sampling time (p0115[1]).
- Deactivate the affected filter (p1414).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7422 Drive: Speed controller reference module natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The filter natural frequency of the PT2 element for the reference model (p1433) is higher
than the Shannon frequency. The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the
following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0].
Remedy: - Reduce natural frequency of PT2 element for reference model (p1433).
- Reduce speed control sampling time (p0115[1]).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7430 Drive: Converter cannot switch to torque-controlled operation
Reaction: NONE
Cause: When operating in sensorless mode, the converter cannot switch to torque-controlled
operation (BI: p1501).
Remedy: Do not attempt to switch to torque-controlled operation.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7500 Drive: Power section data set PDS not configured
Reaction: NONE
Cause: For closed-loop I/RF only:
Power section dataset not parameterized, i.e. no data set number entered in the associated
drive data set.
Fault value Drive data set number of p0185
(r0949):
Remedy: The index of the power section data set associated with the drive data set must be entered
in p0185.
See also: p0185
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7501 Drive: Motor data set MDS not configured
Reaction: NONE
Cause: For power sections only:
The motor data set has not been configured, e. g. no data set number entered in the
associated drive data set.
Fault value Fault value contains the drive data set number of p0186.
(r0949):
Remedy: The index of the motor data set associated with the drive data set must be entered in p0186.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-33
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Acknowl.: Immediate
F7800 Drive: No power section present
Reaction: NONE
Cause: The power section parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power
section.
See also: r0200
Remedy: Connect data line to power section and restart control unit (POWER ON).
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7801 Drive: Power section Overcurrent
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Permissible motor limit current exceeded.
- Effective current limit set too low.
- Current controller not set correctly.
- Motor decelerated with stall torque factor set too high.
- V/f mode: Start-up ramp set too low or load to high.
- V/f mode: Short-circuit in motor cable or ground fault
- V/f mode: Motor current does not match motor module current.
Remedy: - Check current limits (p0323, p0640).
- Check current controller (p1715, p1717).
- Reduce stall torque correction factor (p0326).
- Reduce start-up ramp (p1318) or reduce load.
- Check motor and motor cable for short-circuits and ground fault.
- Check motor module and motor combination.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7802 Drive: Infeed or power section not ready
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Infeed or drive signals not ready after internal ON command.
- Monitoring time too short.
- DC link voltage not present.
- Associated infeed or drive of component signaling the fault is defective.
Remedy: - Increase monitoring time (p0857).
- Provide DC link voltage. Check the DC-link busbar. Enable infeed module.
- Replace associated infeed or drive of component signaling the fault.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A7805 Drive: Power section I2T overload
Cause: Warning threshold for I2t overload (p0294) exceeded.
The reaction is set in p0290 is initiated.
See also: p0290
Remedy: - Reduce permanent load.
- Adapt duty cycle.
- Check assignment of rated currents for motor and motor modules.
F7810 Drive: Power section EEPROM without rated data
Reaction: NONE
Cause: No rated data are stored in the power section EEPROM.
See also: p0205, r0206, r0207, r0208, r0209
Remedy: Replace power section or inform Siemens Customer Service.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7815 Drive: Power section has been changed
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Code number of the current power sections does not match the stored number.
See also: r0200, p0201
Fault value Number of the incorrect parameter.
(r0949):

SINAMICS G150
10-34 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Remedy: Connect the original power section and activate the control unit again (POWER ON) or set
p0201 = r0200 and initiate commissioning with p0010 = 0.
If the new power section is accepted, the current limit p0640 can be reduced by means of a
lower maximum power section current (r0209) (torque limits are retained).
If the motor is replaced in addition to the power section, the motor must be re-commissioned
(e.g. via p0010=1).
See also: r0200
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7820 Drive: Temperature sensor not connected
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Temperature sensor specified in p600 for motor temperature monitoring is not available.
Remedy: Connect temperature sensor or activate a different temperature sensor according to p600.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7840 Drive: Infeed not ready
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: No ready signal present for infeed although enable signals for drive available for some time.
- Infeed not ready or not enabled.
- Wrong interconnection of binector input for ready signal (p0864).
Remedy: - Enable infeed.
- Check the interconnection of the binector input for the ready signal (p0864).
- Increase monitoring time (p0857).
See also: p0857
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7841 Drive: Infeed signal Ready in operation canceled
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Infeed has canceled the ready signal during operation.
- Wrong interconnection of binector input for ready signal (p0864).
- The enable signals for the infeed had been deactivated.
- Infeed removes the ready signal on account of an error.
- If this drive is to be used to generate support for the DC link,
the error reaction should be set to no reaction if the motor module is to continue to operate.
Remedy: - Check interconnection of binector input for ready signal for infeed (p0864).
- Check enable signals for infeed and activate if necessary.
- Correct fault in infeed and acknowledge message.
- If this drive is to be used to generate support for the DC link, the error reaction should be
set to no reaction if the drive is to continue to operate when the DC link voltage breaks
down.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A7850 External warning 1
Cause: BICO signal external warning triggered. This condition for this external warning is met.
See also: p2112
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this warning.
A7851 External warning 2
Cause: BICO signal external warning triggered. This condition for this external warning is met.
See also: p2116
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this warning.
A7852 External warning 3
Cause: BICO signal external warning triggered. This condition for this external warning is met.
See also: p2117
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this warning.
F7860 External fault 1
Reaction: OFF2

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-35
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Cause: BICO signal external fault triggered.

See also: p2106
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7861 External fault 2
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: BICO signal external fault triggered.
See also: p2107
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7862 External fault 3
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: BICO signal external fault triggered.
See also: p2108
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7900 Drive: Motor blocked
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Motor operates longer at the torque limit than the time specified in p2177 and below the
speed threshold set in p2175.
Remedy: - Check free rotation of motor.
- Check torque limit: r1538 for positive direction of rotation, r1539 for negative direction of
rotation.
- Check setting parameters p2175 and p2177 and correct if necessary.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7901 Drive: Motor overspeed
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The maximum permissible positive or negative speed has been exceeded.
The maximum permissible positive speed is calculated as follows: Minimum(p1082,
CI:p1085) + p2162. The maximum permissible negative speed is calculated as follows:
Maximum(-p1082, CI:1088) - p2162.
Remedy: In positive direction:
-r1084 check and if nec. correct p1082, CI: p1085 and p2162.
In negative direction:
-r1087 check and if nec. correct p1082, CI: p1088 and p2162.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A7910 Drive: Motor Overtemperature
Cause: Motor temperature has exceeded the alarm threshold parameterized in p0604.
The reaction set in p0610 is initiated:
See also: p0610
Alarm value 1: No output current reduction.
(r2124): 2: Output current reduction active.
Remedy: - Check motor load.
- Check motor ambient temperature.
F7950 Drive: Motor parameter defective
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Wrong motor parameters have been entered during commissioning, e. g. p0300 = Motor
type = 0 = No motor.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322,
p0323
Fault value Fault value contains affected parameter number.
(r0949):

SINAMICS G150
10-36 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Remedy: Compare motor data with type plate data and correct if necessary.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322,
p0323, p0323
Acknowl.: Immediate
F7990 Drive: Motor data identification
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: An error has occurred during the identification run.
Fault value 1: Current limit reached.
(r0949): 2: Identified stator resistance outside range 0.1% to 100% of Zn.
3: Identified rotor resistance outside range 0.1% to 100% of Zn.
4: Identified stator reactance outside range 50% to 500% of Zn.
5: Identified main reactance outside range 50% to 500% of Zn.
6: Identified rotor time constant outside range 10ms to 5s.
7: Identified total leakage reactance outside range 5% to 50% of Zn.
8: Identified stator leakage reactance outside range 25% to 250% of Zn.
9: Identified rotor leakage reactance outside range 25% to 250% of Zn.
10: Motor is defective or not connected.
20: Identified threshold voltage outside range 0.5V to 10V.
30: Current controller in voltage limitation.
40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to
prevent inconsistencies.
50: Pulse frequency cannot be implemented with the set current controller sampling rate.
The percentages are referred to the rated impedance of the motors:
Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom
Remedy: Fault value 0: Check whether the motor is connected correctly. Check connection type (star-
delta).
Fault value 1-40: Check whether motor data are entered correctly in P0300, P0304 - P0311.
Is the ratio between the power of the motor and the converter appropriate? The ratio
between converter current and motor current should not be less than 0.5 and not greater
than 4. Check connection type (star/delta).
Fault value 50: Reduce current controller sampling rate.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A7991 Drive: Motor data identification activated
Cause: Motor data identification activated. Motor identification is performed with the next ON
command.
See also: p1910
Remedy: Warning disappears after motor identification has been successfully completed.
See also: p1910
F30001 Power section: Overcurrent
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section has detected an overcurrent.
- Control incorrectly parameterized.
- Motor short-circuit or ground fault.
- V/f mode: Ramp-up set too low.
- V/f mode: Rated current of motor much higher that that of motor module
- Power line not properly connected.
- Power lines exceed maximum permissible length.
- Power section defective.
Fault value Bit 0: Phase R
(r0949): Bit 1: Phase S
Bit 2: Phase T

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-37
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Remedy: - Check motor data, perform commissioning if necessary.

- Check motor switching mode (star/delta)
- V/f mode: Increase ramp-up.
- V/f mode: Check assignment of rated currents for motor and motor modules.
- Check power line connections.
- Check power lines for short-circuit or ground fault.
- Check length of power lines.
- Replace power section.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30002 Power section: DC link Overvoltage
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section has detected overvoltage in DC link.
- Motor returns too much energy.
- Line voltage too high.
Remedy: - Increase feedback time.
- Activate DC link voltage controller.
- Use braking resistor or Active Line Module.
- Activate DC link voltage controller.
- Increase current limit for infeed or use larger module (for Active Line Module).
- Check line voltage.
See also: p0210, p1240
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30003 Power section: DC link Undervoltage
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section has detected undervoltage in DC link.
- Line failure.
- Line voltage below permissible value.
Remedy: Check line voltage
See also: p0210
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30004 Power section: Overtemperature Heatsink AC converter
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section temperature at heatsink of AC converter has exceeded permissible limit.
- Insufficient ventilation, fan failure.
- Overload.
- Ambient temperature too high.
- Pulse frequency too high.
Remedy: - Check that fan is running.
- Check fan mats.
- Check that ambient temperature lies within permissible range.
- Check motor load.
- Reduce pulse frequency if higher than rated pulse frequency.
Caution:
This fault cannot be acknowledged until the value is below the warning threshold for warning
A5000.
See also: p1800
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30005 Power section: Overload I2T
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section overloaded.
- Permissible rated current of power section exceeded permanently.
- Permissible duty cycle not observed.

SINAMICS G150
10-38 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Remedy: - Reduce permanent load.

- Adapt duty cycle.
- Check rated currents of motor and power section.
See also: r0036, r0206, p0307
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30011 Power section: Line phase failure detected
Reaction: OFF1
Cause: Line phase failure detected by power section.
- Fuse in main power circuit.
Remedy: Check fuses in main power circuit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30012 Power section: Temperature sensor Heatsink Wirebreak
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The connection to one of the heatsink temperature sensors in the power section is
interrupted.
See also: r0949
Fault value Bit0: Module duct (electronic module)
(r0949): Bit1: Intake air
Bit2: AC converter 1
Bit3: AC converter 2
Bit4: AC converter 3
Bit5: AC converter 4
Bit6: AC converter 5
Bit7: AC converter 6
Bit8: DC converter 1
Bit9: DC converter 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30013 Power section: Temperature sensor Heatsink Short-circuit
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The heat sink temperature sensor in the motor module is shorted.
Fault value Bit0: Module duct (electronic module)
(r0949): Bit1: Intake air
Bit2: AC converter 1
Bit3: AC converter 2
Bit4: AC converter 3
Bit5: AC converter 4
Bit6: AC converter 5
Bit7: AC converter 6
Bit8: DC converter 1
Bit9: DC converter 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30017 Power section: Hardware current limit tripped too may times
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The hardware current limit in the various phases (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has tripped
too many times. The maximum permissible number of trips depends on the power section
type.
- Control incorrectly parameterized.
- Fault in motor or in power lines.
- Power lines exceed maximum permissible length.
- Motor load too high.
- Power section defective.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-39
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Remedy: - Check motor data.

- Check motor switching mode (star/delta)
- Check motor load.
- Check power line connections.
- Check power lines for short-circuit or ground fault.
- Check length of power lines.
- Replace power section
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30021 Power section: Ground fault
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section has detected a ground fault.
- Ground fault in power lines.
- Winding fault or ground fault. Ground fault at motor
- Current converter defective.
Remedy: - Check power line connections.
- Check motor.
- Check current converter.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30022 Power section: Monitoring U_ce
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (Uce) triggered in power section of the
semiconductor.
- Short-circuit on the motor module output.
- Defective semiconductor in power section
See also: r0949
Fault value Bit0: Phase R
(r0949): Bit1: Phase S
Bit2: Phase T
Bit3: Phototransmitter enable defective
Bit4: Uce checksum error signal interrupted
Remedy: - Check power line connections.
- Select defective semiconductor and replace.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F30025 Power section: Overtemp. Chip
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Chip Temperature of semiconductor has exceed permissible limit.
- Permissible duty cycle not observed.
- Insufficient ventilation, fan failure.
- Overload.
- Ambient temperature too high.
- Pulse frequency too high
Remedy: - Adapt duty cycle.
- Check that fan is running.
- Check fan mats
- Check that ambient temperature lies within permissible range
- Check motor load
- Reduce pulse frequency if higher than rated pulse frequency
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30027 Power section: Precharging DC link Monitoring
Reaction: OFF2

SINAMICS G150
10-40 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Cause: Unable to precharge DC link of power section within the expected time.
- Power supply too low.
- Defective line phase.
- Short-circuit or ground fault in DC link.
- Precharging circuit defective.
See also: p0210
Remedy: - Check line voltage.
- Check line connection.
See also: p0210
Acknowled.: Immediate
F30029 Power section: Motor/line filter Temperature sensor Wire break
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Connection between power section and motor/line filter temperature sensor is interrupted.
Remedy: Check temperature sensor for correct connection.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30030 Power section: Motor/line filter temperature sensor short-circuit
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Power section motor/line filter short- circuit in temperature sensor.
Remedy: Check temperature sensor for correct connection.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A30031 Power section: Hardware current limit tripped in phase R
Cause: Current in Phase R has reached permissible current limit of power section. Pulsing is
blocked for one pulse period.
- Control incorrectly parameterized.
- Fault in motor or in power lines.
- Power lines exceed maximum permissible length.
- Motor load too high.
- Power section defective.
Remedy: - Check motor data.
- Check motor switching mode (star/delta)
- Check motor load.
- Check power line connections.
- Check power lines for short-circuit or ground fault.
- Check the length of the power lines.
A30032 Power section: Hardware current limit tripped in phase S
Cause: Current in Phase S has reached permissible current limit of power section. Pulsing is
blocked for one pulse period.
- Control incorrectly parameterized.
- Fault in motor or in power lines.
- Power lines exceed maximum permissible length.
- Motor load too high.
- Power section defective.
Remedy: - Check motor data.
- Check motor switching mode (star/delta)
- Check motor load.
- Check power line connections.
- Check power lines for short-circuit or ground fault.
- Check length of power lines.
A30033 Power section: Hardware current limit tripped in phase T

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-41
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Cause: Current in phase T has reached permissible current limit for power section. Pulsing is
blocked for one pulse period.
- Control incorrectly parameterized.
- Fault in motor or in power lines.
- Power lines exceed maximum permissible length.
- Motor load too high.
- Power section defective.
Remedy: - Check motor data.
- Check motor switching mode (star/delta)
- Check motor load.
- Check power line connections.
- Check power lines for short-circuit or ground fault.
- Check length of power lines.
F30035 Power section: Overtemperature Intake air
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section air-intake temperature has exceeded the permissible limit.
- Ambient temperature too high.
- Insufficient ventilation, fan failure
Remedy: - Check that fan is running.
- Check fan mats.
- Check that ambient temperature lies within permissible range.
Caution:
This fault cannot be acknowledged until the value is below the warning threshold for warning
A5002.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30036 Power section: Overtemperature Electronic module
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section Temperature in module duct of converter has exceeded permissible limit.
- Insufficient ventilation, fan failure.
- Overload.
- Ambient temperature too high.
Remedy: - Check that fan is running.
- Check fan mats.
- Check that ambient temperature lies within permissible range.
Caution:
This fault cannot be acknowledged until the value is below the warning threshold for warning
A5003.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30037 Power section: Overtemperature DC converter
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Power section DC converter temperature has exceeded permissible limit.
- Insufficient ventilation, fan failure.
- Overload.
- Ambient temperature too high.
- Line phase failure
Remedy: - Check that fan is running.
- Check fan mats.
- Check that ambient temperature lies within permissible range.
- Check motor load.
- Check line phases.
Caution:
This fault cannot be acknowledged until the value is below the warning threshold for warning
A5004.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30040 Power section undervoltage 24V

SINAMICS G150
10-42 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Failure in 24V power supply for power section.
- Below the 16 V threshold for longer than 3 ms.
Remedy: Check 24V DC voltage of power section.
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F30801 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign of life missing
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30805 Power section: Checksum EPROM not correct
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Internal parameter data damaged
Remedy: Replace module
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30808 Power section: Power ON required
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: When a project is downloaded to a drive that has been put into operation, the power must be
switched on.
Remedy: POWER ON for all components (switch off/on).
Acknowl.: POWER ON
F30820 - Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram faulted
F30825
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30826 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F30827
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace Control Unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30828 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Receive ALARM bit
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30829 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F30830
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30831 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram faulted

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-43
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30832 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram failure
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30833 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30834 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30835 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F30836
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30837 Power section DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect
F30838
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and affected power section defective.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30860 - CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted / Telegram faulted
F30871
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30872 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F30873
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Reserved for later use.
Remedy: Reserved for later use.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
10-44 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

F30874 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30875 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Receive ALARM bit
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30876 - CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F30879
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30880 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30881 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram failure
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30882 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-45
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

F30883 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Replace Control Unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30884 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Redundancy link error
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Reserved for later use.
Remedy: Reserved for later use.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30885 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30886 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30887 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect
F30888
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace Control Unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30889 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30890 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Connection setup
Reaction: OFF2

SINAMICS G150
10-46 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30891 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Transition to cyclic mode
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F30899 Power section: unknown fault
Reaction: NONE
Cause: Version Sensor module does not match
Remedy: Upgrade drive
Acknowl.: Immediate
A30920 Power section: Temperature sensor error
Cause: An error has occurred while evaluating the temperature sensor.
Alarm value 1: Wire break or sensor not connected.
(r2124): 2: Short-circuit has occurred.
3: Measured resistance lies below permissible evaluation range.
4: No sensor selected.
5: Internal buffer does not contain the required number of stored values.
6: Negative difference voltage measured.
Remedy: - Check sensor connection.
- Replace sensor.
A35200 TM: Calibration data
Cause: Error detected in calibration data of TM.
Alarm value The hundred thousands and ten thousands places specify the component ID of the TMxx at
(r2124): which the error occurred.
The thousands place specifies whether an analog input (==0) or analog output (==1) is
affected.
The hundreds place specifies the error type:
0 == No calibration data stored
1 == Offset too large (> 100 mV)
The tens and units places specify the number of the affected input.
Remedy: Switch the unit off and on again. If the fault persists, replace the module.
F35207 TM: Temperature threshold exceeded
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The temperature measured (r4105) during TM temperature measurement has exceeded the
threshold that triggers this fault (p4402[1]). Note that this fault can only be triggered when
temperature evaluation is active (p4100 = 2 for KTY sensor or p4100 = 1 for PTC sensor)
Warning:
Note that fault F35207 only causes the drive to be switched off if at least one BICO
interconnection exists between the drive and TM31.
Fault value The hundred thousands and ten thousands places indicate the component ID of the TMxx at
(r0949): which the error occurred.
Remedy: Cool off temperature sensor.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-47
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

Acknowl.: Immediate
A35208 TM: Temperature input short circuit
Cause: The resistance measured for the temperature sensor is too low (R_Sensor <= 30 Ohm). The
inputs for the temperature sensor on the TM31 (X522.7, X522.8) may be shorted.
Alarm value The hundred thousands and ten thousands places indicate the component ID of the TMxx
(r2124): where the error occurred.
Remedy: Check the cable connection between the temperature sensor and the terminals of the TM for
shorting or insulation faults. Check the temperature sensor. You can read the measured
sensor resistance in r4101.
A35209 TM: KTY resistance below permissible range
Cause: The measured resistance for the temperature sensor is outside the permissible range. This
error message is generated when the sensor resistance drops below 340 ohms
(corresponding to -40 degrees C for a KTY84-130).
Alarm value The hundred thousands and ten thousands places indicate the component ID of the TMxx at
(r2124): which the error occurred.
Remedy: Check whether the supply cables from terminals X522.7 and X522.8 to the temperature
sensor are interrupted. Check whether the sensor temperature has dropped to below -40
degrees C. Check whether the temperature sensor is working correctly.
A35210 TM: KTY resistance above permissible range
Cause: The measured sensor resistance is above the permissible range. This error message is
triggered if the measured sensor resistance exceeds 1630 ohms (corresponding to a
temperature of 180 degrees C for a KTY84-130).
Alarm value The hundred thousands and ten thousands places indicate the component ID of the TMxx at
(r2124): which the error occurred.
Remedy: Check whether the supply cables from terminals X522.7 and X522.8 to the temperature
sensor are interrupted. Check whether the sensor temperature has exceeded 180 degrees
C. Check whether the temperature sensor is working correctly.
A35211 TM: Temperature threshold exceeded
Cause: The temperature measured (r4105) during TM temperature measurement has exceeded the
threshold that triggers this warning (p4402[0]).
Alarm value The hundred thousands and ten thousands places indicate the component ID of the TMxx at
(r2124): which the error occurred.
Remedy: Cool off temperature sensor.
F35800 TM: Group alarm
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: The terminal module has detected at least one error.
Remedy: Assesses other current messages.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A35801 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign of life missing
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: Check DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- Replace TM.
A35802 TM: Time slice overflow
Cause: Time slice overflow on TM
Remedy: Replace TM.
A35803 TM: Memory test
Cause: An error occurred during the RAM test on the TM.
Remedy: Check whether the permissible ambient temperature has been observed for the TM.
Replace TM.
A35804 TM: CRC

SINAMICS G150
10-48 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Cause: Checksum error encountered while reading out program memory on TM.
Remedy: - Check whether the permissible ambient temperature has been observed for the TM .
- Replace TM.
A35805 TM: Checksum EPROM not correct
Cause: Internal parameter data corrupted.
Remedy: - Check whether the permissible ambient temperature has been observed for the module.
- Replace module.
A35806 TM: Initialization
Cause: An error occurred on the TM during initialization.
Remedy: none
A35807 TM: Process control Watchdog
Cause: Error timeout Process control on TM
Remedy: Replace TM.
F35820 - TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram faulted
F35825
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35826 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F35827
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace Control Unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35828 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Receive ALARM bit
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35829 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Fault in cyclic data transfer
F35830
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35831 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-49
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

F35832 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram failure

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
See also: p9916
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35833 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35834 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35835 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F35836
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35837 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect
F35838
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: There is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the control unit and the affected
terminal module.
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35860 - CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted / Telegram faulted
F35871
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35872 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F35873
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Reserved for later use.
Remedy: Reserved for later use.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
10-50 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

F35874 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35875 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Receive ALARM bit
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35876 - CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
F35879
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check cabinet design and cabling for EMC conformity.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35880 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35881 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram failure
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35882 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-51
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

F35883 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect

Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Replace Control Unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35884 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Redundancy link error
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: Reserved for later use.
Remedy: Reserved for later use.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35885 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: fault in cyclic data transfer
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35886 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35887 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware defect
F35888
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: Replace Control Unit.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35889 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Data transfer faulted
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A35890 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Connection setup
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.

SINAMICS G150
10-52 Operating Manual
11/03 Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms

Alarm value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component

(r2124): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check for break in DRIVE-CLiQ or faulty contacts in connector.
- Check 24 V supply of affected component.
- Replace affected component.
F35891 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Transition to cyclic mode
Reaction: OFF2
Cause: DRIVE-CLiQ communication between control unit and at least one other component is
defective.
Fault value Bit 0 - 7: Number of the affected component
(r0949): Bit 8 - 31: Reserved
Remedy: - Check firmware states of affected components.
- Replace affected component.
Acknowl.: Immediate
F35899 TM: Unknown fault
Reaction: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred on the TM for which there is no name in the firmware. This fault may
occur when the TM firmware is more recent than the firmware on the CU.
Remedy: Replace TM. If nec. adapt the TM firmware version (r0158) to the firmware version used on
the CU.
Acknowl.: Immediate
A35900 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization
Cause: TM cannot synchronize to DRIVE-CLiQ.
Remedy: Check DRIVE-CLiQ connections between CU and TM.
A35901 TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Communication faulted
Cause: Signal received by the TM via the DRIVE-CLiQ is of poor quality
Remedy: Check DRIVE-CLiQ connections between CU and TM.
A35903 TM: Error I2C bus
Cause: An error occurred on access via the TM-internal I2C bus.
Remedy: Replace TM.
A35904 TM: EEPROM
Cause: An error occurred while accessing the flash memory of the TM.
Remedy: Replace TM.
A35905 TM: Parameter access
Cause: CU has attempted to write an impermissible parameter value to the TM.
Remedy: Check whether the firmware version of the TM (r0158) matches that of the CU (r0018).
Replace. TM. The readme.txt file on the flash card states the matching TM firmware version
for a given CU firmware version.
A35920 TM: Temperature sensor error
Cause: An error has occurred while evaluating the temperature sensor.
Alarm value 1: Wire break or sensor not connected.
(r2124): 2: Short-circuit has occurred.
3: Measured resistance lies below permissible evaluation range.
4: No sensor selected.
5: Internal buffer does not contain the required number of stored values.
6: Negative difference voltage measured.
Remedy: - Check sensor connection.
- Replace sensor.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 10-53
Diagnosis / Faults and Alarms 11/03

SINAMICS G150
10-54 Operating Manual
11 Maintenance and Servicing
11
11.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular
basis to ensure the availability of the cabinet unit
• Exchanging device components when the unit is serviced
• Reforming the DC link capacitors
• Upgrading the Cabinet Unit Firmware
• Load the new operator panel firmware and database from the PC.

DANGER
Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the de-energized cabinet
unit, wait for 5 minutes after switching off the supply voltage. This allows the
capacitors to discharge to a harmless level (< 25 V) after the supply voltage has
been switched off.

Before starting work, you should also measure the voltage after the 5 minutes have
elapsed!

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 11-1
Maintenance and Servicing 11/03

11.2 Maintenance
The cabinet unit mainly comprises electronic components. Apart from the fan(s),
the unit contains very few components that are subject to wear or require
maintenance or servicing. Maintenance aims to preserve the specified condition of
the cabinet unit. Dirt and contamination must be removed regularly and parts
subject to wear replaced.
The following points must generally be observed.

11.2.1 Cleaning

Dust deposits
Dust deposits inside the cabinet unit must be removed at regular intervals (or at
least once a year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations.
The cabinet must be cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner, and dry
compressed air (max. 1 bar) for areas that cannot be easily reached.

Ventilation
The ventilation openings in the cabinet must never be obstructed. The fan must be
checked to make sure that it is functioning correctly.

Cable and Screw Terminals

Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are
secure in position, and if necessary, retightened. Cabling must be checked for
defects. Defective parts must be replaced immediately.

NOTE
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend
on the installation conditions (cabinet environment) and the operating conditions.

Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further
details, contact your regional office or sales office.

SINAMICS G150
11-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Maintenance and Servicing

11.2.2 Replacing the Filter Mats

The filter mats must be checked at regular intervals. If the mats are too dirty to
allow the air supply to flow normally, they must be replaced.

NOTE
Not replacing contaminated filter mats can cause premature drive shutdown.

11.3 Servicing
Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the
operating condition of the cabinet unit.

11.3.1 Replacing the Fan

The service life of the device fans is normally 50,000 hours. The actual service life,
however, depends on various factors, such as the ambient temperature and the
degree of protection for the cabinet and can, therefore, differ. The fans must be
replaced promptly to ensure that the cabinet unit is always available.

Removal
1. Unscrew the fastening screws on the fan (3x/ Torx M6)
2. Disconnect the fan cable from the terminal and remove it (2x)
3. Pull out the fan
4. Detach the fan from the fixing bracket by removing the bolts M6 (2x)
5. Remove the fixing bracket

Installation
1. Mount the fixing bracket
2. Secure the fan to the fixing bracket by tightening the bolts M6 (2x) to a torque of
10 Nm
3. Push the fan into place
4. Connect the fan cable (2x/ 1.2 Nm)
5. Tighten the fastening screws on the fan (3x/ Torx M6) to a torque of 10 Nm

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 11-3
Maintenance and Servicing 11/03

11.3.2 Replacing the Fan Fuses

The order numbers for replacing fan fuses that have blown can be found in the
spare parts list.
WARNING
Make sure that the cause of the fault is found before the fuse is replaced.

11.3.3 Replacing the Fuses for the Auxiliary Power Supply (-F11/-F12)

The order numbers for replacing auxiliary power supply fuses that have blown can
be found in the spare parts list in section 8of the documentation folder.

WARNING
You must carry out the following:

• First disconnect the auxiliary power supply

• Identify the cause of the fault
• Then replace the fuse.

11.3.4 Replacing Fuse -F21

1. Open the cabinet

2. Remove the defective fuse
3. Fit the replacement fuse and close the fuse holder
4. Close the cabinet
The order numbers for replacing fuses that have blown can be found in the spare
parts list.

WARNING
You must carry out the following:

• First disconnect the auxiliary power supply

• Identify the cause of the fault
• Then replace the fuse.

SINAMICS G150
11-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Maintenance and Servicing

11.3.5 Replacing the Cabinet Operator Panel

1. Open the main circuit-breaker

2. Open the cabinet
3. Disconnect the power supply and communications line on the operator panel
4. Release the fastenings on the operator panel
5. Remove the operator panel
6. Install the new operator panel
7. Carry out any other work by reversing the sequence

11.3.6 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet Operator Panel

Table 11-1 Technical data for the backup battery

Type CR2032 3V lithium battery

Manufacturer Maxell, Sony, Panasonic
Rated capacity 220 mAh
Maximum permissible charging 10 mA (restricted to <2 mA in operator panel)
current
Self-discharge at 20°C 1 %/year
Service life (in backup mode) > 1 year at 70°C; >1.5 years at 20 °C
Service life (in operation) > 2 years

Replacing the Battery

1. Switch off the main circuit-breaker
2. Open the cabinet
3. Disconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line on the operator
panel
4. Open the cover of the battery compartment
5. Remove the old battery
6. Insert the new battery
7. Close the cover of the battery compartment
8. Reconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line
9. Close the cabinet

WARNING
To ensure that no data is lost when you replace the battery, you must replace the
battery within one minute.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 11-5
Maintenance and Servicing 11/03

Fig. 11-1 Replacing the backup battery in the cabinet operator panel

SINAMICS G150
11-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Maintenance and Servicing

11.4 Reforming the DC Link Capacitors

Description
If the cabinet unit is kept in storage for more than 2 years, the DC link capacitors
have to be reformed. If this is not carried out, the cabinet may be damaged when
the supply voltage is switched on.
If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture, the DC
link capacitors do not need to be reformed. The date of manufacture is indicated in
the serial number on the type plate (see "Device Overview").

NOTE
It is important that the period of storage is calculated as of the date of manufacture
and not as of the delivery date.

Procedure
The DC link capacitors are reformed by applying the rated voltage without load for
at least 30 minutes at room temperature.
• Operation via PROFIBUS (CDS 0):
– Set bit 3 of control word 1 (operation enable) permanently to "0".
– Switch on the converter by means of an ON signal (bit 0 of the control word);
all the other bits must be set in such a way that the converter can be
operated.
– Once the waiting time has elapsed, switch off the converter and restore the
original PROFIBUS setting.
• Operation via the terminal block (CDS 1):
– Set p0852[1] to "0" (factory setting is "1").
– Switch on the converter (via digital input 0 on the customer terminal block).
– Once the waiting time has elapsed, switch off the converter and restore the
original setting for p0852[1].

NOTE
Reforming cannot be carried out in LOCAL mode via the AOP30.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 11-7
Maintenance and Servicing 11/03

11.5 Upgrading the Cabinet Unit Firmware

When you upgrade the cabinet unit firmware (by installing a new CompactFlash
Card with a new firmware version, for example), you may also have to upgrade the
firmware for the components in the cabinet unit.
When you implement new firmware on the CompactFlash Card, the firmware for
the CU320 is upgraded automatically when you install it and switch it on.
The cabinet unit components (power section and customer terminal block) are
supplied with the firmware by means of the procedure described below.
The firmware versions for the individual components can be read in the following
parameters:
• r0128 – Firmware version of the power section
• r0158 – Firmware version of the customer terminal block

NOTE
The power supply to the components must not be interrupted while the firmware is
being upgraded.

CAUTION
New firmware should only be installed if there is a problem with the cabinet unit.

Problems with the cabinet unit cannot be ruled out after the firmware has been
upgraded.

SINAMICS G150
11-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Maintenance and Servicing

Upgrading the Firmware for the Cabinet Unit Components

Set the "Expert" access level on the operator panel

Access level "Expert"
<Key pushbutton> - <Access level> - Enter the activation code
"47"

p7828 = 2 Select the node number of the power section

The node number of the power section is "2".

Upgrade the firmware

p7829 = 1
This process lasts a few minutes. It has been completed
successfully when p7829 automatically switches to "0".
Select the node number of the customer terminal block
p7828 = 3
The node number of the customer terminal block (-A60) is "3".

Upgrade the firmware

p7829 = 1
This process lasts a few minutes. It has been completed
successfully when p7829 automatically switches to "0".
POWER ON
POWER ON
To activate the new firmware, switch the power supply off and
then on.
Fault during the upgrade
Faults that occur while the firmware is being upgraded are indicated by fault F1005 and a
fault value.

Fig. 11-2 Upgrading the cabinet unit firmware

NOTE
Once the firmware has been upgraded, the firmware for the operator panel must
also be upgraded.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 11-9
Maintenance and Servicing 11/03

11.6 Loading New Operator Panel Firmware and the

Database from the PC

Description
You have to load the database for the operator panel each time you require a
language other than that stored in the operator panel, or
if the firmware of the cabinet unit has been upgraded to enhance its functionality or
rectify problems.
The load program LOAD_AOP30 and the database files are available on the CD.

Procedure for Loading the Database

1. Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30.
2. Connect the 24 V power supply.
3. Start the LOAD_AOP30 program on the PC.
4. Choose the PC interface (COM1, COM2).
5. Depending on the language you require, choose a file
(AOP30_DB.V01.02.12.D.E.BIN, for example) and open it to start loading the
database.
6. Once the database has been loaded, "Database loaded" is displayed on the
AOP30.
7. Switch the power on (switch the power supply off and then back on).

Procedure for Loading Firmware and the Database

1. Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30.
2. Connect the 24 V power supply.
3. Start the LOAD_AOP30 program on the PC.
4. Choose the PC interface (COM1, COM2).
5. Choose and open the firmware (AOP30.H86).
6. Follow the instructions in the status window of the program and connect the
power supply for the AOP30 while pressing the red key (O).
7. The load procedure is started automatically.
8. If a current database has not been loaded, the system switches to the "loading
database" screen once the loading procedure has finished.
9. Depending on the language you require, choose a file
(AOP30_DB.V01.02.12.D.E.BIN, for example) and open it to start loading the
database.
10. Once the database has been loaded, "Database loaded" is displayed on the
AOP30.
11. Switch the power on (switch the power supply off and then back on).

SINAMICS G150
11-10 Operating Manual
11/03 Maintenance and Servicing

11.7 Using a Replacement CompactFlash Card

Description
When you replace a flash card with a new card from Siemens, you have to activate
the cabinet settings before carrying out commissioning.

Procedure
• When you switch the system on for the first time, the message "Configuration?"
appears on the operator panel.
Confirm with "YES" (soft key).
• After initialization, the initial motor commissioning screen is displayed. Before
you start commissioning, however, you first have to load the cabinet factory
setting.
• Call up the main menu.
• Set the "Expert" access level.
• MENU – Parameterization – All Parameters
• p0009 = 30
• p0976 = 20, 21, or 22
– 380 V - 480 V, 110 kW - 250 kW: p0976 = 20
– 380 V - 480 V, 315 kW - 560 kW: p0976 = 21
– 660 V - 690 V, 75 kW - 800 kW: p0976 = 22
• When the parameter list is displayed again, the basic settings are loaded
(ignore any faults).
Switch on the power and start commissioning as normal.

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 11-11
Maintenance and Servicing 11/03

SINAMICS G150
11-12 Operating Manual
12 Technical Data
12
12.1 Chapter Content
This chapter provides information on the following:
• General and specific technical data for the SINAMICS G150 cabinet units
• Information on restrictions that apply when the cabinets are used in unfavorable
ambient conditions (derating)

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-1
Technical Data 11/03

12.2 General Data

Table 12-1 General technical data

Electrical data
Power frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Output frequency 0 Hz to 83 Hz
Power factor
Fundamental mode ≥ 0.98
Total 0.93 to 0.96
Converter efficiency > 98 %
Switching at input Once every 3 minutes
Mechanical data
Degree of protection IP 20 (higher degrees of protection up to IP 54 optional)
Type of cooling Forced air cooling
Sound pressure level ≤ 72 dB(A) at 50 Hz line frequency
≤ 75 dB(A) at 60 Hz line frequency
Shock-hazard protection BGV A2
Cabinet system Rittal TS 8, doors with double-barb lock
Paint finish RAL 7035 (indoor requirements)
Compliance with standards
Standards EN 60 146-1, EN 61 800-2, EN 61 800-3, EN 50 178, EN 60 204-1, EN 60 529
CE marking According to EMC directive No. 89/336/EC and low voltage directive No. 73/23/EC
Electromagnetic RI suppression filter according to EN 55 011, Class A1, available as option (for
compatibility TN/TT systems)
RI suppression According to EMC product standard for variable-speed drives EN 61 800-3
(restricted distribution)
Ambient conditions
Operation Storage Transport
Ambient temperature 0 °C to +40 °C -25 °C to +55 °C -25 °C to +70 °C
Up to + 50 °C with Above –40 °C for 24 hours
derating
Humidity range 5 % to 95 % 5 % to 95 % 5 % to 95 % at 40 °C
(non-condensing)
Corresponds to class 3K3 to IEC 60 721-3-3 1K4 to IEC 60 721-3-1 2K3 to IEC 60 721-3-2
Site altitude Up to 2000 m above sea level without derating,
> 2000 m above sea level with derating, see Section 12.2.1
Mechanical stability
Vibratory load:
Deflection 0.075 mm at 10 Hz - 58 1.5 mm at 5 Hz - 9 Hz 3.5 mm at 5 Hz - 9 Hz
Hz 5 m/s² at > 9 Hz - 200 Hz 10 m/s² at > 9 Hz - 200 Hz
Acceleration 10 m/s² at > 58 Hz - 200
Hz 1M2 to IEC 60 721-3-1 2M2 to IEC 60 721-3-2
Corresponds to class -
Shock load:
Acceleration 100 m/s² at 11 ms 40 m/s² at 22 ms 100 m/s² at 11 ms
Corresponds to class 3M4 to IEC 60 721-3-3 1M2 to IEC 60 721-3-1 2M2 to IEC 60 721-3-2

SINAMICS G150
12-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

12.2.1 Derating Data

Current Derating as a Function of the Site Altitude and Ambient Temperature

If the cabinet units are operated at a site altitude >2000 m above sea level, the
maximum permissible output current can be calculated using the following tables.
The site altitude and ambient temperature are compensated here. The degree of
protection selected for the cabinet units must also be taken into account.

Table 12-2 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature and site altitude for cabinet units
with degree of protection IP20 / IP21 and IP23

Site altitude Ambient temperature in °C

above sea level in 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
m
0 to 2000 95.0% 90.0%
Up to 2500 100% 96.3% 91.4% 86.6%
Up to 3000 96.2% 92.5% 87.9% 83.3%
Up to 3500 96.7% 92.3% 88.8% 84.3% 79.9%
Up to 4000 97.8% 92.7% 88.4% 85.0% 80.8% 76.5%

Table 12-3 Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature and site altitude for cabinet units
with degree of protection IP54

Site altitude Ambient temperature in °C

above sea level in 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
m
0 to 2000 98.0% 93.0% 90.0% 85.0% 81.0%
Up to 2500 100% 99.0% 94.0% 90.0% 86.0% 82.0% 77.0%
Up to 3000 95.0% 90.0% 86.0% 83.0% 79.0% 74.0%
Up to 3500 96.0% 91.0% 87.0% 83.0% 80.0% 75.0% 71.0%
Up to 4000 92.0% 87.0% 83.0% 79.0% 76.0% 72.0% 68.0%

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-3
Technical Data 11/03

Voltage Derating as a Function of the Site Altitude

In addition to current derating, voltage derating must also be considered at site
altitudes >2000 m above sea level.

Table 12-4 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude, 380 V - 480 V

Site altitude above Max. input voltage Rated converter input voltage
sea level in m in V 380 V 400 V 420 V 440 V 460 V 480 V
0 to 2000 480
Up to 2250 461 96%
Up to 2500 451 98% 94%
Up to 2750 432 100% 98% 94% 90%
Up to 3000 422 95% 91% 88%
Up to 3250 408 97% 93% 89% 85%
Up to 3500 394 98% 93% 89% 85% 82%
Up to 3750 380 95% 91% 87% 83% 79%
Up to 4000 365 96% 92% 87% 83% 80% 76%

Table 12-5 Voltage derating as a function of the site altitude, 660 V - 690 V

Site altitude above Max. input voltage Rated converter input voltage
sea level in m in V 660 V 690 V
0 to 2000 690 100%
Up to 2250 660 96%
Up to 2500 648 98% 94%
Up to 2750 621 95% 90%
Up to 3000 607 92% 88%
Up to 3250 586 89% 85%
Up to 3500 565 85% 82%
Up to 3750 545 83% 79%
Up to 4000 524 80% 76%

12.3 Technical Data

NOTE
The current, voltage, and output values specified in the following tables are rated
values.
The cables to the cabinet unit are protected with fuses with gL characteristic.
The connection cross-sections are calculated for three-core copper cables installed
horizontally in free air at an ambient temperature of 30 °C (86 °F) (in accordance
with DIN VDE 0298 Part 2 / Group 5) and the recommended line protection in
accordance with DIN VDE 0100 Part 430.
AWG (American Wire Gauge for cross-sections < 120 mm²); MCM (Mille Circular
Mil): American wire gauge for cross-sections > 120 mm².

SINAMICS G150
12-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

12.3.1 Cabinet Unit Version A, 380 V – 480 V

Table 12-6 Version A, 380 V – 480 V, part 1

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GE32-1AA0 1GE32-6AA0 1GE33-1AA0
Rated motor output kW 110 132 160
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 239 294 348
Rated output current A 210 260 310
Base load current A 205 250 302
Power loss kW 2.9 3.8 4.4
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.23 0.36
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 67/68 69/73 69/73
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
AWG / MCM 2 x (000) 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
AWG / MCM 2 x (000) 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 150
AWG / MCM 2 x (400) 2 x (400) 2 x (400)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 320 320 390
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 252 3NA3 254 3NA3 365
Rated current A 315 355 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 2 3
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 230-2 3NE1 231-2 3NE1 334-2
Rated current A 315 350 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 1 2 2

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-5
Technical Data 11/03

Table 12-7 Version A, 380 V – 480 V, part 2

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GE33-8AA0 1GE35-0AA0 1GE36-1AA0
Rated motor output kW 200 250 315
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 405 519 639
Rated output current A 380 490 605
Base load current A 370 477 590
Power loss kW 5.3 6.4 8.2
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.36 0.36 0.78
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 69/73 69/73 70/73
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 120 2 x 185 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (300) 2 x (500) 2 x (600)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 120 2 x 185 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (300) 2 x (500) 2 x (600)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (400) 2 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 480 480 860
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 1000 x 2000 x 600 1000 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 365 3NA3 372 3NA3 475
Rated current A 500 630 800
Size to DIN 43 620-1 3 3 4
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 334-2 3NE1 436-2 3NE1 438-2
Rated current A 500 630 800
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 3 3

SINAMICS G150
12-6 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

Table 12-8 Version A, 380 V – 480 V, part 3

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GE37-5AA0 1GE38-4AA0 1GE41-0AA0
Rated motor output kW 400 450 560
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 785 883 1034
Rated output current A 745 840 985
Base load current A 725 820 960
Power loss kW 9.6 10.1 14.4
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.78 0.78 1.48
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 70/73 70/73 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 300 4 x 150 4 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (800) 4 x (400) 4 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 8 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (4 holes) M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 300 4 x 150 4 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (800) 4 x (400) 4 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 6 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (3 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 M12 M12
(10 holes) (16 holes) (18 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 865 1075 1360
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 1200 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 1600 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 475 Protective device Protective device
Rated current A 800
Size to DIN 43 620-1 4 Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 448-2
Rated current A 850
Size to DIN 43 620-1 3

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-7
Technical Data 11/03

12.3.2 Cabinet Unit Version C, 380 V – 480 V

Table 12-9 Version C, 380 V – 480 V, part 1

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GE32-1CA0 1GE32-6CA0 1GE33-1CA0
Rated motor output kW 110 132 160
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 239 294 348
Rated output current A 210 260 310
Base load current A 205 250 302
Power loss kW 2.9 3.8 4.4
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.23 0.36
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 67/68 69/73 69/73
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
AWG / MCM 2 x (000) 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (600) 2 x (600) 2 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 70 2 x 95 2 x 120
AWG / MCM 2 x (000) 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 150
AWG / MCM 2 x (400) 2 x (400) 2 x (400)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 225 225 300
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 230-2 3NE1 231-2 3NE1 334-2
Rated current A 315 350 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 1 2 2

SINAMICS G150
12-8 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

Table 12-10 Version C, 380 V – 480 V, part 2

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GE33-8CA0 1GE35-0CA0 1GE36-1CA0
Rated motor output kW 200 250 315
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 405 519 639
Rated output current A 380 490 605
Base load current A 370 477 590
Power loss kW 5.3 6.4 8.2
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.36 0.36 0.78
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 69/73 69/73 70/73
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 120 2 x 185 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (300) 2 x (500) 2 x (600)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (600) 2 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 120 2 x 185 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (300) 2 x (500) 2 x (600)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (400) 2 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (4 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 300 300 670
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600 600 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 334-2 3NE1 436-2 3NE1 438-2
Rated current A 500 630 800
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 3 3

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-9
Technical Data 11/03

Table 12-11 Version C, 380 V – 480 V, part 3

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GE37-5CA0 1GE38-4CA0 1GE41-0CA0
Rated motor output kW 400 450 560
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 785 883 1034
Rated output current A 745 840 985
Base load current A 725 820 960
Power loss kW 9.6 10.1 14.4
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.78 0.78 1.48
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 70/73 70/73 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 300 4 x 150 4 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (800) 4 x (400) 4 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 8 x (600) 8 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (4 holes) M12 (4 holes) M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 300 4 x 150 4 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (800) 4 x (400) 4 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 8 x 240 8 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 8 x (600) 8 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (4 holes) M12 (4 holes) M12 (4 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (8 holes) M12 (8 holes) M12
(10 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 670 670 980
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 600 x 2000 x 600 600 x 2000 x 600 1000 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 448-2 Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker
Rated current A 850
Size to DIN 43 620-1 3

SINAMICS G150
12-10 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

12.3.3 Cabinet Unit Version A, 660 V – 690 V

Table 12-12 Version A, 660 V – 690 V, part 1

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH28-5AA0 1GH31-0AA0 1GH31-2AA0
Rated motor output kW 75 90 110
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 103 119 141
Rated output current A 85 100 120
Base load current A 80 95 115
Power loss kW 1.7 2.1 2.7
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.17 0.17
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 67/68 67/68 67/68
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 50 50 70
AWG / MCM (00) (00) (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 50 50 70
AWG / MCM (00) (00) (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 70 2 x 150 2 x 150
AWG / MCM 2 x (000) 2 x (400) 2 x (400)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 320 320 320
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 132-6 3NA3 132-6 3NA3 136-6
Rated current A 125 125 160
Size to DIN 43 620-1 1 1 1
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 022-2 3NE1 022-2 3NE1 224-2
Rated current A 125 125 160
Size to DIN 43 620-1 00 00 1

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-11
Technical Data 11/03

Table 12-13 Version A, 660 V – 690 V, part 2

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH31-5AA0 1GH31-8AA0 1GH32-2AA0
Rated motor output kW 132 160 200
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 174 201 234
Rated output current A 150 175 215
Base load current A 140 171 208
Power loss kW 2.8 3.8 4.2
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 67/68 69/73 69/73
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 95 120 2 x 70
AWG / MCM (4/0) (300) 2 x (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 95 120 2 x 70
AWG / MCM (4/0) (300) 2 x (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 150
AWG / MCM 2 x (400) 2 x (400) 2 x (400)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 320 390 390
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 240-6 3NA3 244-6 3NA3 252-6
Rated current A 200 250 315
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 2 2
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 225-2 3NE1 227-2 3NE1 230-2
Rated current A 200 250 315
Size to DIN 43 620-1 1 1 1

SINAMICS G150
12-12 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

Table 12-14 Version A, 660 V – 690 V, part 3

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH32-6AA0 1GH33-3AA0 1GH34-1AA0
Rated motor output kW 250 315 400
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 280 353 436
Rated output current A 260 330 410
Base load current A 250 320 400
Power loss kW 5.0 6.1 8.1
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.36 0.36 0.78
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 69/73 69/73 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 95 2 x 120 2 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300) 2 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 95 2 x 120 2 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300) 2 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (500) 2 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 390 390 860
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 800 x 2000 x 600 800 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 354-6 3NA3 365-6 3NA3 365-6
Rated current A 355 500 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 3 3 3
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 331-2 3NE1 334-2 3NE1 334-2
Rated current A 350 500 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 1 1

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-13
Technical Data 11/03

Table 12-15 Version A, 660 V – 690 V, part 4

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH34-7AA0 1GH35-8AA0 1GH37-4AA0
Rated motor output kW 450 560 710
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 493 608 774
Rated output current A 465 575 735
Base load current A 452 560 710
Power loss kW 9.1 10.8 13.5
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.78 0.78 1.48
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 72/75 72/75 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (500) 2 x (600) 3 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (500) 2 x (600) 3 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 6 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (3 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (18 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 860 860 1320
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 1200 x 2000 x 600 1200 x 2000 x 600 1600 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection
(with option L26) 3NA3 352-6 3NA3 354-6 3NA3 365-6
Rated current A 2 x 315 2 x 355 2 x 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 3 3
Cond./semi-cond. protection
(without option L26) 3NE1 435-2 3NE1 447-2 3NE1 448-2
Rated current A 560 670 850
Size to DIN 43 620-1 3 3 3

SINAMICS G150
12-14 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

Table 12-16 Version A, 660 V – 690 V, part 5

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH38-1AA0
Rated motor output kW 800
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 852
Rated output current A 810
Base load current A 790
Power loss kW 14.7
Cooling air requirement m³/s 1.48
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 4 x 150
AWG / MCM 4 x (400)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 4 x 150
AWG / MCM 4 x (400)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 6 x 240
AWG / MCM 6 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (3 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (18 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 1360
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 1600 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Conductor protection Circuit-breaker
(with option L26)
Rated current A
Size to DIN 43 620-1
Cond./semi-cond. protection Circuit-breaker
(without option L26)
Rated current A
Size to DIN 43 620-1

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-15
Technical Data 11/03

12.3.4 Cabinet Unit Version C, 660 V – 690 V

Table 12-17 Version C, 660 V – 690 V, part 1

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH28-5CA0 1GH31-0CA0 1GH31-2CA0
Rated motor output kW 75 90 110
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 103 119 141
Rated output current A 85 100 120
Base load current A 80 95 115
Power loss kW 1.7 2.1 2.7
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.17 0.17
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 67/68 67/68 67/68
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 50 50 70
AWG / MCM (00) (00) (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (600) 2 x (600) 2 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 50 50 70
AWG / MCM (00) (00) (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 70 2 x 150 2 x 150
AWG / MCM 2 x (000) 2 x (400) 2 x (400)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 225 225 225
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 022-2 3NE1 022-2 3NE1 224-2
Rated current A 125 125 160
Size to DIN 43 620-1 00 00 1

SINAMICS G150
12-16 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

Table 12-18 Version C, 660 V – 690 V, part 2

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH31-5CA0 1GH31-8CA0 1GH32-2CA0
Rated motor output kW 132 160 200
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 174 201 234
Rated output current A 150 175 215
Base load current A 140 171 208
Power loss kW 2.8 3.8 4.2
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 67/68 69/73 69/73
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 95 120 2 x 70
AWG / MCM (4/0) (300) 2 x (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 2 x 240 2 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (600) 2 x (600) 2 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 95 120 2 x 70
AWG / MCM (4/0) (300) 2 x (000)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 150
AWG / MCM 2 x (400) 2 x (400) 2 x (400)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 225 300 300
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 225-2 3NE1 227-2 3NE1 230-2
Rated current A 200 250 315
Size to DIN 43 620-1 1 1 1

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-17
Technical Data 11/03

Table 12-19 Version C, 660 V – 690 V, part 3

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH32-6CA0 1GH33-3CA0 1GH34-1CA0
Rated motor output kW 250 315 400
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 280 353 436
Rated output current A 260 330 410
Base load current A 250 320 400
Power loss kW 5.0 6.1 8.1
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.36 0.36 0.78
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 69/73 69/73 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 95 2 x 120 2 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300) 2 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 240 4 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (600) 4 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (2 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 95 2 x 120 2 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (4/0) 2 x (300) 2 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 4 x 240
AWG / MCM 2 x (500) 2 x (600) 4 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (1 hole) M12 (1 hole) M12 (2 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 300 300 670
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 400 x 2000 x 600 400 x 2000 x 600 600 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 331-2 3NE1 334-2 3NE1 334-2
Rated current A 350 500 500
Size to DIN 43 620-1 2 2 2

SINAMICS G150
12-18 Operating Manual
11/03 Technical Data

Table 12-20 Version C, 660 V – 690 V, part 4

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH34-7CA0 1GH35-8CA0 1GH37-4CA0
Rated motor output kW 450 560 710
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 493 608 774
Rated output current A 465 575 735
Base load current A 452 560 710
Power loss kW 9.1 10.8 13.5
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.78 0.78 1.48
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 72/75 72/75 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (500) 2 x (600) 3 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 2 x 185 2 x 240 3 x 185
AWG / MCM 2 x (500) 2 x (600) 3 x (500)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 4 x 240 4 x 240 6 x 240
AWG / MCM 4 x (600) 4 x (600) 6 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (3 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (2 holes) M12 (2 holes) M12 (18 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 670 670 940
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 600 x 2000 x 600 600 x 2000 x 600 1000 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection 3NE1 435-2 3NE1 447-2 3NE1 448-2
Rated current A 560 670 850
Size to DIN 43 620-1 3 3 3

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual 12-19
Technical Data 11/03

Table 12-21 Version C, 660 V – 690 V, part 5

Category Unit
Order no. 6SL3710- 1GH38-1CA0
Rated motor output kW 800
Rated connection voltage V 3 AC 660 V to 690 V ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Rated input current A 852
Rated output current A 810
Base load current A 790
Power loss kW 14.7
Cooling air requirement m³/s 1.48
Sound pressure level at 50/60 dB(A) 72/75
Hz
Power connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 4 x 150
AWG / MCM 4 x (400)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 8 x 240
AWG / MCM 8 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (4 holes)
Motor connection
2
Recommended: DIN VDE mm 4 x 150
AWG / MCM 4 x (400)
2
Maximum: DIN VDE mm 6 x 240
AWG / MCM 6 x (600)
Fastening screw M12 (3 holes)
Protective earth connection
Fastening screw M12 (18 holes)
Approx. weight (standard kg 980
version)
Dimensions (w x h x d) mm 1000 x 2000 x 600
Recommended protection
Cond./semi-cond. protection Circuit-breaker
Rated current A
Size to DIN 43 620-1

SINAMICS G150
12-20 Operating Manual
11/03 Abbreviations

Abbreviations
A... Alarm
AC Alternating current
AD, ADC Analog / digital converter
ADR Address
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
AOP Advanced Operator Panel (with plain-text display)

BERO Company name for a proximity switch

BI Binector input
BICO Binector / connector
BO Binector output

C Capacity
CAN Serial bus system
CB Communication module
CD Compact disc
CDS Command data set
CI Connector input
CMD Command
COM Mid-position contact of a changeover contact
CPU Central processing unit
CT Constant torque
CU Control Unit

DA, DAC Digital / analog converter

DC Direct current
DDS Drive data set
DI Digital input
DI/DO Bi-directional digital input / output
DO Digital output

EGB Electrostatic-sensitive devices

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN European standard

F ... Fault
FAQ Frequently asked questions
FI Residual current-operated device
Float Floating point number

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual Abbreviations -1
Abbreviations 11/03

FW Firmware
I/O Input / Output
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IGBT Bipolar transistor with insulated gate electrode

L Inductance
LED Light-emitting diode
MB Megabyte
MDS Motor data set
MLFB Machine-readable product designation

NC NC contact (normally closed)

NEMA Standards institute in USA
NO NO contact (normally open)

OEM Original equipment manufacturer

p ... Setting parameter

PDS Power section data set
PE Protective earth
PROFIBUS Serial data bus
PTC Positive temperature coefficient

r ... Read-only parameter

RAM Random access memory (read / write)
RS232 Serial interface
RS485 Standard that describes hardware design of a digital serial interface

S1 Continuous operation
S3 Intermittent operation
SH Safe standstill
SI Safety integrated
SPS Programmable logic controller
STW PROFIBUS control word

TIA Totally integrated automation

TM Terminal module

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

Vdc DC link voltage

VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
(Association for Electrical, Electronic, and Information Technologies)
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure
(Association of German Engineers)
VT Variable torque

SINAMICS G150
Abbreviations -2 Operating Manual
11/03 Index

Index
A Derating Data............................................ 12-3
A7850 – External Warning 1 ...................10-10 Design......................................................... 2-3
A7860 – External Fault 1.........................10-10 Device Commissioning, Menu .................. 6-11
A7862 – External Fault 3.........................10-11 Device Overview ......................................... 2-1
Alarms and Faults ...................................10-10 Diagnosis
Analog Inputs................................... 4-22, 6-20 LEDs...................................................... 10-2
Analog Inputs, Further Settings.................6-27 Parameters............................................ 10-4
Analog Outputs.................................. 4-23, 8-2 Diagnosis Operator Panel......................... 6-10
AOP30 – Diagnosis ...................................6-10 Digital Inputs ....................................4-21, 4-22
Applications .................................................2-2 Digital inputs/outputs ................................ 4-24
Automatic Restart........................................9-5 Digital Outputs ............................................ 8-6
Auxiliary Supply .........................................4-16 Direction Reversal....................................... 7-2
AC 230 V................................................4-17 Display Settings .......................................... 6-6
DC 24 V .................................................4-17 Drive Commissioning, Menu..................... 6-11
Auxiliary Voltage........................................4-23 E
B Electromagnetic Compatibility
Basic Commissioning .......................... 5-4, 5-6 Introduction.............................................. 4-7
Battery Status ............................................6-10 Noise Emissions...................................... 4-7
Braking Unit 100 kW (Option L61).............4-33 Operational Reliability and Noise Immunity4-7
Braking Unit 200 kW (Option L62).............4-33 Electromagnetic Compatibilty
C EMC-Compliant Installation..................... 4-7
Cabinet Anti-Condensation Heating (Option EMERGENCY OFF Button (Option L45)). 4-28
L55)........................................................4-29 EMERGENCY OFF Category 0 (Option L57)4-30
Cabinet Illumination with Service Socket EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 (Option L59)4-31
(Option L50) ...........................................4-29 EMERGENCY OFF Category 1 (Option L60)4-32
Cable Lengths ...........................................4-10 Ersatz-CompactFlash Card einsetzen .... 11-11
Certificate of Compliance with Order ..........1-2 EU Declaration of Conformity ..................... 1-2
Certification..................................................1-2 EU Manufacturer’s Declaration................... 1-2
Checklist External Fault 1....................................... 10-10
Electrical Installation ................................4-2 External Fault 3....................................... 10-11
Mechanical Installation ............................3-4 External Supply......................................... 4-16
Circuit-Breaker (Option L26) .....................4-27 External Warning 1 ................................. 10-10
Cleaning ....................................................11-2 F
Closed-Loop Control ...................................7-8 Factory Settings ........................................ 5-10
Communications Test................................6-10 Fan Voltage, Adjustment .......................... 4-12
Connection Cross-Sections.......................4-10 Faults and Alarms ..................................... 6-16
Connection for External Auxiliary Equipment Features...................................................... 2-2
(Option L19) ...........................................4-26 Filter Mats, Replace.................................. 11-3
Control Settings ...........................................6-6 Firmware, Upgrading ................................ 11-8
Control via PROFIBUS.................... 6-29, 6-32 Fixed Setpoints ......................................... 6-25
Control via the Terminal Block ..................6-19 Fixed Speed Setpoints.............................. 6-25
Control Word 1 ..........................................6-33 Flying Restart.............................................. 9-7
Customer Terminal Block ..........................4-18 Fuse -F11/-F12 ......................................... 11-4
D Fuse -F21.................................................. 11-4
Data Backup ................................................5-9 I
Database Version......................................6-10 Increase Key ............................................. 6-13
Date .............................................................6-9 Initial Commissioning.................................. 5-3
Date of Manufacture....................................2-7 Installation................................................... 3-4
Decrease Key ............................................6-13 Insulation Monitor (Option L87) ................ 4-40
Defining the Operation Screen ....................6-6 K
Derating .....................................................12-3 Keyboard Test........................................... 6-10

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual Index-3
Index 11/03

L Process Data ............................................ 6-33

L13.............................................................4-25 PROFIBUS Bus Terminating Resistor ...... 6-30
L19.............................................................4-26 PROFIBUS Connection ............................ 6-29
L26.............................................................4-27 PROFIBUS Connectors ............................ 6-30
L45.............................................................4-28 PT100 Evaluation Unit (Option L86) ......... 4-38
L50.............................................................4-29 Q
L55.............................................................4-29 Qualified Personnel .................................... 1-1
L57.............................................................4-30 Quality......................................................... 2-2
L59.............................................................4-31 R
L60.............................................................4-32 Ramp Generator ......................................... 7-5
L61.............................................................4-33 Reforming the DC Link Capacitors ........... 11-7
L62.............................................................4-33 Relay Outputs ........................................... 4-24
L83.............................................................4-38 Removing the Interference Suppression
L84.............................................................4-38 Capacitor ............................................... 4-15
L86.............................................................4-38 Replacing the Backup Battery of the Cabinet
L87.............................................................4-40 Operator Panel ...................................... 11-5
Loading Firmware (Operator Panel)........11-10 Replacing the Cabinet Operator Panel..... 11-5
Loading the Database (Operator Panel) .11-10 Replacing the Fan..................................... 11-3
LOCAL/REMOTE Key ...............................6-11 Replacing the Fan Fuses.......................... 11-4
M Resetting Parameters ............................... 5-10
M13..............................................................3-9 Resetting System Settings.......................... 6-9
M21..............................................................3-7 S
M23..............................................................3-8 S5 – Selector for Voltage/Current AI0, AI14-23
M54..............................................................3-8 Saving the Parameters, Permanently....... 6-17
M78..............................................................3-9 Selecting Data Sets .................................... 6-6
Main Circuit-Breaker incl. Fuses (Option L26)4-27Service ........................................................ 2-3
Main Contactor (Option L13) .....................4-25 Service and Support ................................. 10-8
Maintenance ..............................................11-2 Servicing ................................................... 11-3
Maintenance and Servicing .......................11-1 Setpoint Channel ........................................ 7-2
Menu Structure ............................................6-4 Setpoint Channel, Further Settings............. 7-7
Message Frame Type, Selecting...............6-34 Setting the Language.................................. 6-9
Minimum Speed................................... 7-3, 7-7 Setting the PROFIBUS Address ............... 6-32
Monitoring Functions ...................................9-2 Settings, Menu ............................................ 6-6
Motor Data, Entering ...................................5-4 Signal Connections................................... 4-18
Motor Data, Entering ...................................5-5 Software Version....................................... 6-10
Motor potentiometer ..................................6-14 Speed Limitation ......................................... 7-4
Motor Potentiometer..................................6-23 Status Word 1 ........................................... 6-34
Motor Type, Selecting .................................5-5 Storage ....................................................... 3-3
O Suppression Speed .................................... 7-7
OFF Key ....................................................6-12 Switching Between Clockwise and Counter-
ON Key ......................................................6-12 Clockwise Rotation................................ 6-13
Operation.....................................................6-1 T
Operation Screen ........................................6-5 Technical Data .......................................... 12-4
Operator Input Inhibit.................................6-14 Version A, 380 V – 480 V...................... 12-5
Operator Panel ............................................5-2 Version A, 660 V – 690 V.................... 12-11
Operator Panel Overview ............................6-3 Version C, 380 V – 480 V...................... 12-8
Option Short Codes.....................................2-8 Version C, 660 V – 690 V.................... 12-16
Output Terminals .........................................8-1 Temperature Sensor................................. 4-23
P Thermistor Motor Protection Unit (Option
Parameterization Errors ............................6-18 L83/L84) ................................................ 4-38
Parameterization Inhibit.............................6-14 Time ............................................................ 6-9
Parameterization, Menu ..............................6-6 Timeout-Monitoring................................... 6-11
Power Connections ...................................4-10 TM31......................................................... 4-18
Connecting the Motor and Power Cables4-11 TM31, Connection Overview .................... 4-20
Power Supply, Internal ..............................4-14 TM31, Front View...................................... 4-19

SINAMICS G150
Index-4 Operating Manual
11/03 Index

Tools.................................................... 3-5, 4-5 W

Transportation .............................................3-2 Wiring Principle ........................................... 2-6
Troubleshooting.........................................10-2 X
Type Plate ...................................................2-7 X520.......................................................... 4-21
Data .........................................................2-8 X521.......................................................... 4-22
V X522.......................................................... 4-23
Vdc-Max Closed-Loop Control ....................9-3 X530.......................................................... 4-22
Version A, Design........................................2-4 X540.......................................................... 4-23
Version C, Design .......................................2-5 X541.......................................................... 4-24
X542.......................................................... 4-24

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual Index-5
11/03 Parameterlist

Parameterlist
0002 - Drive status ................................................................................................................... 10-4
0020 - Speed setpoint smoothed ............................................................................................... 6-8
0021 - Actual speed smoothed................................................................................................... 6-8
0024 - Output frequency............................................................................................................. 6-8
0025 - converter output voltage smoothed................................................................................. 6-8
0026 - DC link voltage smoothed ............................................................................................... 6-8
0027 - Absolute actual current smoothed .................................................................................. 6-8
0028 - Control factor smoothed.................................................................................................. 6-8
0029 - Field-producing current component ................................................................................ 6-8
0030 - Torque-producing current component............................................................................. 6-8
0031 - Actual torque smoothed .................................................................................................. 6-8
0032 - Output smoothed............................................................................................................. 6-8
0035 - Motor temperature........................................................................................................... 6-8
0036 - Converter overload.......................................................................................................... 6-8
0037 - Converter temperature .................................................................................................... 6-8
0046 - Missing enable signals .................................................................................................. 10-4
0050 - Active command data set (CDS)................................................................................... 10-5
0060 - Speed setpoint upstream of setpoint filter....................................................................... 8-4
0061 - Motor speed unsmoothed ............................................................................................... 8-4
0062 - Speed setpoint downstream of filter................................................................................ 6-8
0063 - Actual speed after smoothing .................................................................................. 6-8, 8-4
0064 - Control deviation ...................................................................................................... 6-8, 8-4
0065 - Slip frequency ..........................................................................................................6-8, 8-4
0066 - Output frequency...................................................................................................... 6-8, 8-4
0068 - Output current ................................................................................................................. 8-4
0069 - Actual phase current ....................................................................................................... 8-4
0070 - DC link voltage ................................................................................................................ 8-4
0072 - Output voltage................................................................................................................. 6-8
0074 - Control factor................................................................................................................... 6-8
0074 - Speed setpoint upstream of setpoint filter....................................................................... 8-4
0075 - Field-producing current setpoint ..................................................................................... 8-4
0076 - Field-producing actual current ........................................................................................ 8-4
0077 - Torque-producing current setpoint.................................................................................. 8-4
0078 - Torque-producing actual current.............................................................................. 6-8, 8-4
0079 - Torque setpoint ............................................................................................................... 8-4
0080 - Actual torque value ......................................................................................................... 6-8
0082 - Output power................................................................................................................... 8-4
0083 - Flux setpoint.................................................................................................................... 8-4
0084 - Actual flux........................................................................................................................ 8-4
0088 - DC link voltage setpoint .................................................................................................. 8-4
0089 - Phase voltage ................................................................................................................. 8-4
0721 - Actual terminal value CU320 digital inputs ................................................................... 10-5
0747 - Status of digital outputs CU320 .................................................................................... 10-5
1001 - Fixed speed setpoint 01 ................................................................................................ 6-26
1002 - Fixed speed setpoint 02 ................................................................................................ 6-26
1003 - Fixed speed setpoint 03 ................................................................................................ 6-26
1024 - Fixed speed setpoint active ...................................................................................6-8, 6-26
1037 - Motor potentiometer maximum speed .......................................................................... 6-24
1038 - Motor potentiometer minimum speed ........................................................................... 6-24
1047 - Motor potentiometer ramp-up time................................................................................ 6-24
1048 - Motor potentiometer ramp-down time ........................................................................... 6-24

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual Parameterlist-1
Parameterlist 11/03

1050 - Active motor potentiometer setpoint ............................................................................... 6-8

1050 - Motor potentiometer speed setpoint downstream of ramp generator........................... 6-24
1080 - Minimum speed............................................................................................................... 7-3
1082 - Speed limit ...................................................................................................................... 7-4
1083 - Speed limit positive direction of rotation ......................................................................... 7-4
1086 - Speed limit negative direction of rotation ........................................................................ 7-4
1091 - Suppression speed 1 ...................................................................................................... 7-8
1092 - Suppression speed 2 ...................................................................................................... 7-8
1093 - Suppression speed 3 ...................................................................................................... 7-8
1094 - Suppression speed 4 ...................................................................................................... 7-8
1101 - Suppression speed bandwidth........................................................................................ 7-8
1112 - Speed setpoint after minimum limit................................................................................. 7-3
1114 - Speed setpoint upstream of ramp generator .................................................................. 6-8
1119 - Resulting speed setpoint................................................................................................. 6-8
1120 - Ramp generator ramp-up time........................................................................................ 7-6
1121 - Ramp generator ramp-down time ................................................................................... 7-6
1130 - Ramp generator start rounding time ............................................................................... 7-6
1131 - Ramp generator end rounding time ................................................................................ 7-6
1200 - Flying restart operating mode ......................................................................................... 9-8
1202 - Flying restart detection current ....................................................................................... 9-8
1203 - Flying restart search rate ................................................................................................ 9-8
1210 - Automatic restart mode ................................................................................................... 9-5
1211 - Automatic restart starting attempts ................................................................................. 9-6
1212 - Automatic restart waiting time first starting attempt ........................................................ 9-6
1213 - Automatic restart waiting time increment ........................................................................ 9-6
1240 - Vdc controller configuration............................................................................................. 9-3
1242 - Vdc-max controller switch-on level ................................................................................. 9-3
1243 - Vdc-max controller dynamic factor.................................................................................. 9-3
1250 - Vdc controller proportional gain ...................................................................................... 9-3
1251 - Vdc controller integral time.............................................................................................. 9-4
1252 - Vdc controller derivative time .......................................................................................... 9-4
1254 - Vdc-max controller automatic detection of ON level....................................................... 9-4
1480 - Speed controller output ................................................................................................... 8-4
1482 - I component of speed controller...............................................................................6-8, 8-4
1508 - Speed controller output ................................................................................................... 6-8
2000 - Reference speed............................................................................................................. 6-9
2001 - Reference voltage ........................................................................................................... 6-9
2002 - Reference current ........................................................................................................... 6-9
2003 - Reference torque ............................................................................................................ 6-9
2004 - Reference power............................................................................................................. 6-9
2050 - PROFIBUS setpoint ........................................................................................................ 6-8
4022 - Status of TM31 digital inputs......................................................................................... 10-6
4047 - Status of TM31 digital outputs ...................................................................................... 10-6
4052 - Current input voltage/current ........................................................................................ 6-21
4052[0] - Analog input 0 [V, mA] ................................................................................................ 6-8
4052[1] - Analog input 1 [V, mA] ................................................................................................ 6-8
4053 - Smoothing time constant analog inputs ........................................................................ 6-22
4055 - Current per-unit input value .......................................................................................... 6-22
4055[0] - Analog input 0, scaled................................................................................................. 6-8
4055[1] - Analog input 1, scaled................................................................................................. 6-8
4056 - Analog input type .......................................................................................................... 6-21
4057[0] - Value x1 for the analog input characteristic .............................................................. 6-27
4058[0] - Value y1 for the analog input characteristic .............................................................. 6-27
4059[0] - Value x2 for the analog input characteristic .............................................................. 6-28
4060[0] - Value y2 for the analog input characteristic .............................................................. 6-28

SINAMICS G150
Parameterlist-2 Operating Manual
11/03 Parameterlist

4063 - Analog input offset ........................................................................................................ 6-21

4071 - Signal source for the analog output ......................................................................... 8-2, 8-3
4073 - Smoothing time for analog output ............................................................................ 8-2, 8-3
4074 - Current output voltage/current ................................................................................. 8-2, 8-3
4076 - Analog output type .......................................................................................................... 8-3
4077 - Value x1 for the analog output characteristic........................................................... 8-8, 8-9
4078 - Value y1 for the analog output characteristic........................................................... 8-8, 8-9
4079 - Value x2 for the analog output characteristic.................................................................. 8-9
4080 - Value y2 for the analog output characteristic.................................................................. 8-9

SINAMICS G150
Operating Manual Parameterlist-3
Parameterlist 11/03

SINAMICS G150
Parameterlist-4 Operating Manual
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
Large Drives
P.O. Box 4743, D-90025 Nuremberg © Siemens AG 2003
Subject to change
Federal Republic of Germany Doc.-No.: A5E00189855A

www.ad.siemens.de Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany